You are on page 1of 304

Table of Contents

Introduction 4
Congratulations 4
Safety and environment protection 5
Symbol glossary 8
Instrument Cluster 10
Warning and control lights 10
Gauges 15
Entertainment Systems 19
AM/FM stereo 19
AM/FM stereo cassette 23
AM/FM stereo cassette with CD 29
AM/FM stereo with CD 38
Climate Controls 51
Heater only 51
Manual heating and air conditioning 53
Lights 56
Headlamps 56
Turn signal control 59
Bulb replacement 59
Driver Controls 66
Windshield wiper/washer control 66
Steering wheel adjustment 67
Power windows 69
Mirrors 71
Speed control 72
Message center 77
Locks and Security 82
Keys 82
Locks 82
Anti-theft system 83

1
Table of Contents
Seating and Safety Restraints 89
Seating 89
Safety restraints 93
Air bags 106
Child restraints 115
Driving 127
Starting 127
Brakes 131
Transmission operation 136
Vehicle loading 161
Trailer towing 164
Recreational towing 189
Roadside Emergencies 195
Getting roadside assistance 195
Hazard flasher switch 196
Fuel pump shut-off switch 196
Fuses and relays 198
Changing tires 202
Jump starting 213
Wrecker towing 218
Customer Assistance 220
The dispute settlement board 223
Utilizing the mediation/arbitration 226
Getting assistance outside the U.S. and Canada 226
Ordering additional owners literature 227
Reporting safety defects (U.S. only) 228
Cleaning 229
Cleaning your vehicle 229
Underbody preservation 233

2
Table of Contents
Maintenance and Specifications 235
Hood 236
Engine compartment 237
Engine oil 238
Battery 241
Fuel information 249
Air filter(s) 265
Part numbers 272
Refill capacities 273
Lubricant specifications 276
Engine data 279
Vehicle dimensions 279
Accessories 290

Index 294

All rights reserved. Reproduction by any means, electronic or mechanical


including photocopying, recording or by any information storage and retrieval
system or translation in whole or part is not permitted without written
authorization from Ford Motor Company. Ford may change the contents without
notice and without incurring obligation.
Copyright 2001 Ford Motor Company

3
Introduction
EMISSION WARRANTY
The New Vehicle Limited Warranty includes Bumper-to-Bumper
Coverage, Safety Restraint Coverage, Corrosion Coverage, and 7.3L
Power Stroke Diesel Engine Coverage. In addition, your vehicle is eligible
for Emissions Defect and Emissions Performance Warranties. For a
detailed description of what is covered and what is not covered, refer to
the Warranty Guide that is provided to you along with your Owners
Guide.
CONGRATULATIONS
Congratulations on acquiring your new Ford. Please take the time to get
well acquainted with your vehicle by reading this handbook. The more
you know and understand about your vehicle the greater the safety and
pleasure you will derive from driving it.
For more information on Ford Motor Company and its products visit the
following website:
In the United States: www.ford.com
In Canada: www.ford.ca
In Australia: www.ford.com.au
In Mexico: www.ford.com.mx
Additional owner information is given in separate publications.
This Owners Guide describes every option and model variant available
and therefore some of the items covered may not apply to your
particular vehicle. Furthermore, due to printing cycles it may describe
options before they are generally available.
Remember to pass on the Owners Guide when reselling the vehicle. It is
an integral part of the vehicle.
Fuel pump shut-off switch In the event of an accident the
safety switch will automatically cut off the fuel supply to the
engine. The switch can also be activated through sudden vibration
(e.g. collision when parking). To reset the switch, refer to the Fuel
pump shut-off switch in the Roadside emergencies chapter.

4
Introduction
SAFETY AND ENVIRONMENT PROTECTION

Warning symbols in this guide


How can you reduce the risk of personal injury and prevent possible
damage to others, your vehicle and its equipment? In this guide, answers
to such questions are contained in comments highlighted by the warning
triangle symbol. These comments should be read and observed.
Warning symbols on your vehicle
When you see this symbol, it is
imperative that you consult the
relevant section of this guide before
touching or attempting adjustment
of any kind.
Protecting the environment
We must all play our part in
protecting the environment. Correct
vehicle usage and the authorized
disposal of waste cleaning and
lubrication materials are significant
steps towards this aim. Information in this respect is highlighted in this
guide with the tree symbol.
BREAKING-IN YOUR VEHICLE
There are no particular guidelines for breaking-in your vehicle. During
the first 1 600 km (1 000 miles) of driving, vary speeds frequently. This is
recommended to give the moving parts a chance to break in.
SPECIAL NOTICES
Emission warranty
The New Vehicle Limited Warranty includes Bumper-to-Bumper
Coverage, Safety Restraint Coverage, Corrosion Coverage, and 7.3L
Power Stroke Diesel Engine Coverage. In addition, your vehicle is eligible
for Emissions Defect and Emissions Performance Warranties. For a
detailed description of what is covered and what is not covered, refer to
the Warranty Guide that is provided to you along with your Owners
Guide.
Special instructions
For your added safety, your vehicle is fitted with sophisticated electronic
controls.

5
Introduction

By operating other electronic equipment (e.g. mobile telephone


without exterior aerial) electromagnetic fields can occur which
can cause malfunctions of the vehicle electronics. Therefore you should
observe the instructions of the equipment manufacturers.

Please read the section Air bag in the Seating and safety
restraints chapter. Failure to follow the specific warnings and
instructions could result in personal injury.

Front seat mounted rear facing child or baby seats should


NEVER be used in front of a passenger side air bag unless the
air bag can be and is turned OFF.

Notice to owners of diesel-powered vehicles


Read the 7.3 Liter Power Stroke Direct Injection Turbo Diesel Owners
Guide Supplement for information regarding correct operation and
maintenance of your diesel-powered light truck.
Notice to owners of pickup trucks and utility type vehicles
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than
other types of vehicles.

Before you drive your vehicle, please read this Owners Guide carefully.
Your vehicle is not a passenger car. As with other vehicles of this type,
failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or an
accident.
Using your vehicle with a snowplow
For more information and guidelines for using your vehicle with a
snowplow, refer to the Driving chapter.
Using your vehicle as an ambulance
If your light truck is equipped with the Ford Ambulance Preparation
Package, it may be utilized as an ambulance. Ford urges ambulance
manufacturers to follow the recommendations of the Ford Incomplete
Vehicle Manual, Ford Truck Body Builders Layout Book and the QVM
guidelines as well as pertinent supplements. For additional information,
please contact the Truck Body Builders Advisory Service
18778404338.

6
Introduction
Use of your Ford light truck as an ambulance, without the Ford
Ambulance Preparation Package voids the Ford New Vehicle Limited
Warranty and may void the Emissions Warranties. In addition, ambulance
usage without the preparation package could cause high underbody
temperatures, overpressurized fuel and a risk of spraying fuel which
could lead to fires.
If your vehicle is equipped with the
Ford Ambulance Preparation
Package, it will be indicated on the
Certification label. The label is
located on the drivers side door
pillar or on the rear edge of the
drivers door. You can determine
whether the ambulance
manufacturer followed Fords
recommendations by directly
contacting that manufacturer. Ford
Ambulance Preparation Package is
only available on certain 7.3L Diesel
engine equipped vehicles.

Notice to owners with vehicles equipped with Power Take Off


(PTO) capability
Refer to the Driving chapter for more information and guidelines for
operating vehicles equipped with PTO.
Middle East/North Africa vehicle specific information
For your particular global region, your vehicle may be equipped with
features and options that are different from the ones that are described
in this Owner Guide; therefore, a supplement has been supplied that
complements this book. By referring to the pages in the provided
supplement, you can properly identify those features, recommendations
and specifications that are unique to your vehicle. Refer to this Owner
Guide for all other required information and warnings.

7
Introduction
These are some of the symbols you may see on your vehicle.

Vehicle Symbol Glossary

Safety Alert See Owners Guide

Fasten Safety Belt Air Bag-Front

Air Bag-Side Child Seat

Child Seat Installation Child Seat Tether


Warning Anchorage

Brake System Anti-Lock Brake System

Brake Fluid -
Traction Control
Non-Petroleum Based

AdvanceTrac Master Lighting Switch

Hazard Warning Flasher Fog Lamps-Front

Fuse Compartment Fuel Pump Reset

Windshield
Windshield Wash/Wipe
Defrost/Demist
Rear Window Power Windows
Defrost/Demist Front/Rear

8
Introduction

Vehicle Symbol Glossary

Child Safety Door


Power Window Lockout
Lock/Unlock
Interior Luggage
Compartment Release Panic Alarm
Symbol

Engine Oil Engine Coolant

Engine Coolant
Do Not Open When Hot
Temperature

Avoid Smoking, Flames,


Battery
or Sparks

Battery Acid Explosive Gas

Fan Warning Power Steering Fluid

MAX
Maintain Correct Fluid MIN
Emission System
Level

Passenger Compartment
Engine Air Filter
Air Filter

Jack Check fuel cap

Low tire warning

9
Instrument Cluster
WARNING LIGHTS AND CHIMES

Warning lights and gauges can alert you to a vehicle condition that may
become serious enough to cause expensive repairs. A warning light may
illuminate when a problem exists with one of your vehicles functions.
Many lights will illuminate when you start your vehicle to make sure the
bulb works. If any light remains on after starting the vehicle, have
the respective system inspected immediately.
Service engine soon
Illuminates briefly to ensure the
system is functional. If it comes on
after the engine is started, one of
the engines emission control
systems may be malfunctioning. The light may illuminate without a
driveability concern being noted. The vehicle will usually be drivable and
will not require towing.
Light turns on solid:
Temporary malfunctions may cause the light to illuminate. Examples are:
1. The vehicle has run out of fuel.
2. Poor fuel quality or water in the fuel.
3. The fuel cap may not have been properly installed and securely
tightened.
These temporary malfunctions can be corrected by filling the fuel tank
with high quality fuel of the recommended octane and/or properly
installing and securely tightening the fuel cap. After three driving cycles
without these or any other temporary malfunctions present, the light
should turn off. (A driving cycle consists of a cold engine startup
followed by mixed city/highway driving.) No additional vehicle service is
required.

10
Instrument Cluster
If the light remains on, have your vehicle serviced at the first available
opportunity.
Light is blinking:
Engine misfire is occurring which could damage your catalytic converter.
You should drive in a moderate fashion (avoid heavy acceleration and
deceleration) and have your vehicle serviced at the first available
opportunity.
Under engine misfire conditions, excessive exhaust temperatures
could damage the catalytic converter, the fuel system, interior
floor coverings or other vehicle components, possibly causing a fire.

Check fuel cap (if equipped)


Illuminates when the fuel cap is not
installed correctly. Check the fuel
cap for proper installation. When
the fuel filler cap is properly
re-installed, the light(s) will turn off
after a period of normal driving.
Continuing to operate the vehicle with the check fuel cap light on,
mis-installed can activate the Service Engine Soon/Check Engine
warning light.
It may take a long period of time for the system to detect an
improperly installed fuel filler cap.
For more information, refer to Fuel filler cap in the Maintenance and
specifications chapter.

Check gage
Illuminates when the engine coolant CHECK
temperature is high, the engine oil
pressure is low or the fuel gauge is GAGE
at or near empty. Refer to Engine
coolant temperature gauge, Engine oil pressure gauge or Fuel gauge
in this chapter for more information.

11
Instrument Cluster
Brake system warning
To confirm the brake system warning
light is functional, it will momentarily
illuminate when the ignition is
turned to the ON position
(alternatively for some vehicles when the ignition is moved from the ON
position to START position, the light will momentarily illuminate prior to
reaching the START position). It also illuminates if the parking brake is
engaged. If the brake system warning light does not illuminate as
described, seek service immediately. Illumination after the parking brake is
released indicates low brake fluid level or a brake system malfunction and
the brake system should be serviced immediately by a qualified technician.
Refer to Brakes in the Driving chapter for more information.
Anti-lock brake system (ABS)
To confirm the anti-lock brake
system (ABS) warning light is
functional it will momentarily ABS
illuminate when the ignition is
turned to the ON position (alter-
natively for some vehicles when the ignition is moved from the ON
position to the START position, the light will momentarily illuminate just
prior to reaching the START position). If the light remains on, continues
to flash or fails to illuminate, have the ABS serviced immediately. If the
ABS light remains on, it means the anti-lock brake system has malfunc-
tioned and is disabled, however, the normal brake system will still function
unless the brake warning light also remains illuminated and parking brake
is off. Refer to Brakes in the Driving chapter for more information.
Safety belt
Illuminates to remind you to fasten
your safety belts. For more
information, refer to the Seating
and safety restraints chapter.
Air bag readiness
Illuminates to confirm that the air
bags (front or side) are operational.
If the light fails to illuminate,
continues to flash or remains on,
have the system serviced immediately.

12
Instrument Cluster
Charging system
Illuminates when the battery is not
charging properly.

Check air suspension (if equipped)


Illuminates when the air suspension
switch is turned OFF, the load limit
CHECK
is exceeded or the air suspension SUSP
system requires servicing.
For information, refer to Air suspension system in the Driving chapter.

Low fuel
Illuminates when the fuel level in
the fuel tank is at, or near, empty
(refer to Fuel gauge in this chapter
for more information).

Speed control
Illuminates when the speed control
is activated.

Transmission control indicator light (TCIL)


Illuminates when the overdrive
function of the transmission has
been turned OFF using the OVERDRIVE
Transmission Control Switch (TCS).
Refer to the Driving chapter for
transmission function and operation.
If the light does not come on or if the light flashes steadily, have your
vehicle serviced as soon as possible, damage to the transmission could
occur.

13
Instrument Cluster
Turn signals
Illuminates when the turn signals or
the hazard lights are turned on. If
the lights stay on continuously or
flash faster, check for a burned-out bulb.
High beams
Illuminates when the high beam
headlamps are turned on.
Door ajar
Illuminates when any door is open
(or not fully closed).

Four wheel drive low (if equipped)


Illuminates when four-wheel drive LOW
low is is engaged. If the light
continues to flash have the system RANGE
serviced.
Four wheel drive indicator (if equipped)
Illuminates when the four-wheel 4x4
drive is engaged. If the light
continues to flash have the system
serviced.
Safety belt warning chime
Sounds to remind you to fasten your safety belts.
BeltMinder chime
Sounds intermittently to remind you to fasten your safety belts.
Supplemental restraint system (SRS) warning chime
Sounds when a malfunction in the supplemental restraint system (front
or side airbags) has been detected. Have the supplemental restraint
system inspected immediately.
Key-in-ignition warning chime
Sounds when the key is left in the ignition and the drivers door is
opened.

14
Instrument Cluster
Headlamps on warning chime
Sounds when the headlamps or parking lamps are on, the key is removed
from the ignition and the drivers door is opened.
Parking brake ON warning chime
Sounds when the parking brake is set, the engine is running and the
vehicle is driven more than 5 Km (3 mph).
GAUGES

Engine coolant temperature gauge


Indicates the temperature of the
engine coolant. At normal operating
temperature, the needle remains
within the normal area (the area
between the H and C). If it
enters the red section, the engine is
overheating. Stop the vehicle as
soon as safely possible, switch off
the engine immediately and let the
engine cool. Refer to Engine
coolant in the Maintenance and
specifications chapter.
Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the engine is
running or hot. Steam and scalding liquid from a hot cooling
system can burn you badly.

This gauge indicates the temperature of the engine coolant, not the
coolant level. If the coolant is not at its proper level the gauge indication
will not be accurate.

15
Instrument Cluster
Engine oil pressure gauge
Indicates engine oil pressure. At
normal operating temperature, the
needle will be in the normal range
(the area between the L and H);
if the needle goes below the normal
range, stop the vehicle as soon as
safely possible and switch off the
engine immediately. Check the oil
level. Add oil if needed (refer to
Engine oil in the Maintenance
and specifications chapter). If the
oil level is correct, have your vehicle
checked at your dealership or by a qualified technician.

Battery voltage gauge (manual transmission only)


Indicates battery voltage. If the
pointer moves and stays outside the
normal operating range (as
indicated), have the vehicles
electrical system checked as soon as
possible.

Transmission fluid temperature gauge


(automatic transmission only)
If the gauge is in the:
White area (normal) - the
transmission fluid is within the
normal operating temperature
(between H and C).

16
Instrument Cluster
Yellow area (warning) the
transmission fluid is higher than
normal operating temperature. This
can be caused by special operation
conditions (i.e. snowplowing, towing
or off road use). Refer to Special
Operating Conditions in the
scheduled maintenance guide for
instructions. Operating the
transmission for extended periods of
time with the gauge in the yellow
area may cause internal transmission damage.
Altering the severity of the driving conditions is recommended to lower
the transmission temperature into the normal range.
Red area (over temperature)
the transmission fluid is overheating.
Stop the vehicle to allow the
temperature to return to normal
range.

If the gauge is operating in the Yellow or Red area, stop the vehicle and
verify the airflow is not restricted such as snow or debris blocking airflow
through the grill. If the gauge continues to show high temperatures, see
your Ford or Lincoln Mercury dealer.

Fuel gauge
Displays approximately how much
fuel is in the fuel tank. The fuel
gauge may vary slightly when the
vehicle is in motion or on a grade.
When refueling the vehicle from
empty indication, the amount of fuel
that can be added will be less than
the advertised capacity due to the
reserve fuel.

17
Instrument Cluster
Speedometer
Indicates the current vehicle speed.

Odometer
Registers the total kilometers
(miles) of the vehicle.

Trip odometer
Registers the kilometers (miles) of
individual journeys. Press and
release the reset button (this
P RN D
D 2
represents the trip mode). Press
and hold the button for three
seconds to reset.
Tachometer (if equipped)
Indicates the engine speed in
revolutions per minute.
Driving with your tachometer
pointer at the top of the scale may
damage the engine.

18
Entertainment Systems
AM/FM STEREO

VOL
PUSH
ON
TONE TONE VOL ST DX
FM
SEEK
12
CLK TUNE

1 2 3 4 AM/FM

Your vehicle is equipped with a delayed accessory feature. This feature


enables the audio playing media to continue playing up to 10 minutes
after the ignition has been turned off, or until a door is opened.

Volume/power control
Press the control to turn the audio VOL
PUSH
system on or off. ON

Turn the control to raise or lower


volume.
VOL
PUSH
ON

If the volume is set above a certain level and the ignition is turned off,
the volume will come back on at a nominal listening level when the
ignition switch is turned back on.

19
Entertainment Systems
Bass adjust
The bass adjust control allows you VOL
to increase or decrease the audio PUSH
ON
systems bass output. TONE
Press the TONE control once, then
use the volume knob to adjust the CLK
desired level.

Treble adjust
The treble adjust control allows you VOL
to increase or decrease the audio PUSH
ON
systems treble output. TONE
Press the TONE control twice, then
use the volume knob to adjust the CLK
desired level.

Speaker balance adjust


Speaker sound distribution can be VOL
adjusted between the right and left PUSH
ON
speakers. TONE
Press the TONE control three times,
then use the volume knob to adjust CLK
the desired level.

Speaker fade adjust (if equipped)


Speaker sound can be adjusted VOL
between the front and rear PUSH
ON
speakers. TONE
Press the TONE control four times,
then use the volume knob to adjust CLK
the desired level.

Seek function
The seek function control works in radio mode.

20
Entertainment Systems
Seek function in radio mode
Press to find the next
SEEK
listenable station down the
frequency band.
TUNE
Press to find the next
listenable station up the frequency band.

AM/FM select
The AM/FM select control works in
radio mode.
AM/FM

AM/FM select in radio mode


This control allows you to select AM or FM frequency bands. Press the
control to switch between AM, FM1 or FM2 memory preset stations.

Radio station memory preset

1 2 3 4

The radio is equipped with four station memory preset controls. These
controls can be used to select up to four preset AM stations and eight
FM stations (four in FM1 and four in FM2).
Setting memory preset stations
1. Select the frequency band with the AM/FM select control.
2. Select a station. Refer to Tune adjust or Seek function for more
information on selecting a station.
3. Press and hold a memory preset control until the sound returns,
indicating the station is held in memory on the control you selected.

1 2 3 4

21
Entertainment Systems
Setting the clock
Press CLK to toggle between
listening frequencies and clock
mode. TONE
To set the hour, press and hold the
CLK control until CLOCK SET
appears in the display and press the CLK
SEEK control:

to decrease hours and


to increase hours.

To set the minute, press and hold


the CLK control until CLOCK SET
appears in the display and press the TONE
TUNE control:

CLK

to decrease minutes and


to increase minutes.
The CLK control will allow you to
switch between media display mode
(radio station, stereo information,
etc.) and clock display mode (time).
When in clock mode, the media information will display for ten seconds,
when the radio is turned on, and then revert to clock information. Any
time that the media is changed, (new radio station, etc.), the media
information will again display for ten seconds before reverting back to
the clock. In media mode, the media information will always be
displayed.

Tune adjust
The tune control works in radio mode.

22
Entertainment Systems
Tune adjust in radio mode
Press to move to the next SEEK
frequency down the band
(whether or not a listenable TUNE
station is located there). Hold the
control to move through the frequencies quickly.
Press to move to the next frequency up the band (whether or not
a listenable station is located there). Hold for quick movement.

AM/FM STEREO CASSETTE


VOL - PUSH ON

AM FM1 ST CLK
BASS TREB BAL FADE
FM TAPE
AMS

SEEK SIDE 1-2


SCAN EJ
REW FF
TUNE

1 2 3 4 5 6

Your vehicle is equipped with a delayed accessory feature. This feature


enables the audio playing media to continue playing up to 10 minutes
after the ignition has been turned off, or until a door is opened.

Volume/power control
Press the control to turn the audio VOL - PUSH ON
system on or off.

23
Entertainment Systems
Turn the control to raise or lower
volume. VOL - PUSH ON

If the volume is set above a certain level and the ignition is turned off,
the volume will come back on at a nominal listening level when the
ignition switch is turned back on.

Bass adjust
The bass adjust control allows you
to increase or decrease the audio
systems bass output.
BASS

Treble adjust
The treble adjust control allows you
to increase or decrease the audio
systems treble output.
TREB

Speaker balance adjust


Speaker sound distribution can be
adjusted between the right and left
speakers.
BAL

24
Entertainment Systems
Speaker fade adjust
Speaker sound can be adjusted
between the front and rear
speakers.
FADE

Seek function
The seek function control works in radio mode.
Seek function in radio mode
Press to find the next
listenable station down the
frequency band.
Press to find the next
listenable station up the
frequency band.

Scan function
The scan function works in radio
mode. SCAN

Scan function in radio mode


Press the SCAN control to hear a brief sampling of all listenable stations
on the frequency band. Press the SCAN control again to stop the scan
mode.

AM/FM select
The AM/FM select control works in
radio and tape modes.
AM
FM

25
Entertainment Systems
AM/FM select in radio mode
This control allows you to select AM or FM frequency bands. Press the
AM control to select from AM selections, and press the FM control to
select from FM1 or FM2 memory preset stations.
AM/FM select in tape mode
Press this control to stop tape play and begin radio play.

Radio station memory preset


The radio is equipped with six station memory preset controls. These
controls can be used to select up to six preset AM stations and twelve
FM stations (six in FM1 and six in FM2).
Setting memory preset stations
1. Select the frequency band with the AM or the FM select control.
2. Select a station. Refer to Tune adjust or Seek function for more
information on selecting a station.
3. Press and hold a memory preset control until the sound returns,
indicating the station is held in memory on the control you selected.

1 2 3 4 5 6

Setting the clock


Press CLK to toggle between
listening frequencies and clock
mode while in radio mode. CLK
To set the hour, press and hold the
CLK control and press the SEEK TAPE
control: AMS

to decrease hours and


SEEK
to increase hours.
TUNE
DISCS

26
Entertainment Systems
To set the minute, press and hold
the CLK control and press the
TUNE control: CLK
TAPE
AMS

to decrease minutes and


SEEK
to increase minutes.
TUNE
DISCS

The CLK control will allow you to switch between media display mode
(radio station, stereo information, etc.) and clock display mode (time).
When in clock mode, the media information will display for 10 seconds,
when the radio is turned on, and then revert to clock information. Any
time that the media is changed, (new radio station, etc.), the media
information will again display for 10 seconds before reverting back to the
clock. In media mode, the media information will always be displayed.

Tune adjust
The tune control works in radio mode.
Tune adjust in radio mode
Press to move to the next
frequency down the band
(whether or not a listenable
station is located there). Hold the
control to move through the
frequencies quickly.
Press to move to the next frequency up the band (whether or not
a listenable station is located there). Hold for quick movement.

27
Entertainment Systems
Tape select
To enter tape mode while in radio
mode, press the TAPE AMS
control. CLK
TAPE
AMS

Automatic Music Search


The Automatic Music Search feature
allows you to quickly locate the
beginning of the tape selection CLK
being played or to skip to the next
selection.
TAPE
To activate the feature, momentarily AMS
depress the TAPE AMS button.
Then, press either REW (for the
beginning of the current selection) or FF (to advance to the next
selection). The tape deck stops and returns to play mode when the AMS
circuit senses a blank section on the tape.
In order to ensure proper operation of the AMS feature, the tape MUST
have a blank section of at least four seconds duration between programs.

Tape direction select


Press SIDE and 12 at the same
time to play the alternate side of a SIDE 1-2
tape. REW FF

Eject function
Press the control to stop and eject a
tape.
EJ

28
Entertainment Systems
DolbyT noise reduction
Dolbyt noise reduction operates
only in tape mode. Dolbyt noise
reduction reduces the amount of 4
hiss and static during tape playback.
Press the control to activate (and deactivate) Dolbyt noise
reduction.
Dolbyt noise reduction is manufactured under license from Dolbyt
Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Dolbyt and the double-D symbol
are registered trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation.

PREMIUM AM/FM STEREO/CASSETTE/SINGLE CD

VOL PUSH ON DISC


EJ
FM 1 ST

AMC
MUTE
BL RF

AM FM
DOLBY B NR EJ TAPE CD AUTO
SEEK
TUNE SCAN CLK
BASS TREB SEL BAL FADE

REW FF SIDE 1-2 COMP SHUFFLE


1 2 3 4 5 6

Your vehicle is equipped with a delayed accessory feature. This feature


enables the audio playing media to continue playing up to 10 minutes
after the ignition has been turned off, or until a door is opened.

29
Entertainment Systems
Volume/power control
Press the control to turn the audio VOL - PUSH ON
system on or off.
Audio power can also be turned on
by pressing the AM/FM select
control or the TAPE/CD select
control.
Turn control to raise or lower
volume.
VOL - PUSH ON

If the volume is set above a certain level and the ignition is turned off,
the volume will come back on at a nominal listening level when the
ignition switch is turned back on.

Bass adjust
The bass adjust control allows you
to increase or decrease the audio BASS TREB
systems bass output.
Press the BASS control then press:
to decrease the bass output
and
to increase the bass output.

Treble adjust
The treble adjust control allows you
to increase or decrease the audio BASS TREB
systems treble output.
Press the TREB control then press:
to decrease the treble output
and
to increase the treble output.

30
Entertainment Systems
Speaker balance adjust
Speaker sound distribution can be
adjusted between the right and left BAL FADE
speakers.
Press the BAL control then press:
to shift sound to the left and
to shift sound to the right.

Speaker fade adjust


Speaker sound can be adjusted
between the front and rear BAL FADE
speakers.
Press the FADE control then press:
to shift the sound to the
front and
to shift the sound to the rear.
Seek function
The seek function control works in radio, tape or CD mode.
Seek function in radio mode
Press to find the next
listenable station down the
frequency band.
Press to find the next listenable station up the frequency band.
Seek function in tape mode
Press to listen to the previous selection on the tape.
Press to listen to the next selection on the tape.
Seek function in CD mode
Press to seek to the previous
track of the disc. If a selection
has been playing for three
seconds or more and you press , the CD will replay that selection
from the beginning.
Press to seek forward to the next track of the disc. After the last
track has been completed, the first track of the current disc will
automatically replay.

31
Entertainment Systems
Scan function
The scan function works in radio, SCAN
tape or CD mode.

Scan function in radio mode


Press the SCAN control to hear a brief sampling of all listenable stations
on the frequency band. Press the control again to stop the scan mode.
Scan function in tape mode
Press the SCAN control to hear a short sampling of all selections on the
tape. (The tape scans in a forward direction. At the end of the tapes
first side, direction automatically reverses to the opposite side of the
tape.) To stop on a particular selection, press the control again.
Scan function in CD mode
Press the SCAN control to hear a short sampling of all selections on the
CD. (The CD scans in a forward direction, wrapping back to the first
track at the end of the CD.) To stop on a particular selection, press the
control again.

AM/FM select
The AM/FM select control works in
radio, tape and CD modes. AM FM

AM/FM select in radio mode


This control allows you to select AM or FM frequency bands. Press the
control to switch between AM, FM1 or FM2 memory preset stations.
AM/FM select in tape mode
Press this control to stop tape play and begin radio play.
AM/FM select in CD mode
Press this control to stop CD play and begin radio play.
Radio station memory preset
The radio is equipped with six station memory preset controls. These
controls can be used to select up to six preset AM stations and twelve
FM stations (six in FM1 and six in FM2).

32
Entertainment Systems
Setting memory preset stations
1. Select the frequency band with
the AM/FM select control. AM FM
2. Select a station. Refer to Tune
adjust or Seek function for more information on selecting a station.
3. Press and hold a memory preset control until the sound returns,
indicating the station is held in memory of the control you selected.

REW FF SIDE 1-2 COMP SHUFFLE


1 2 3 4 5 6

Autoset memory preset


Autoset allows you to set strong radio stations without losing your
original manually set preset stations. This feature is helpful on trips
when you travel between cities with different radio stations.
Starting autoset memory preset
1. Select a frequency using the AM/FM select controls.
2. Press the control.
3. When the first six strong stations AUTO
are filled, the station stored in
memory preset control 1 will start
playing.
If there are less than six strong CLK
stations available on the frequency
band, the remaining memory preset
controls will all store the last strong station available.
These stations are temporarily stored in the memory preset controls
(until deactivated) and are accessed in the same manner as your original
presets.
To deactivate autoset and return to your audio systems manually set
memory stations, press the AUTO control again.

33
Entertainment Systems
Setting the clock
To set the hour, press and hold the
CLK control and press SEEK:
AUTO

CLK

to decrease hours and


to increase hours.
To set the minute, press and hold
the CLK control and press TUNE:
AUTO

CLK

to decrease minutes and


to increase minutes.
If your vehicle has a separate clock, (other than the digital radio
display), the CLK control will not function in the above manner.
The CLK control will allow you to
switch between media display mode
(radio station, stereo information, AUTO
etc.) and clock display mode (time).
When in clock mode, the media
information will display for 10 CLK
seconds, when the radio is turned
on, and then revert to clock
information. Any time that the
media is changed, (new radio station, etc.), the media information will
again display for 10 seconds before reverting back to the clock. In media
mode, the media information will always be displayed.

34
Entertainment Systems
Tune adjust
The tune control works in radio mode.
Tune adjust in radio mode
Press to move to the next
frequency down the band
(whether or not a listenable
station is located there). Hold the control to move through the
frequencies quickly.
Press to move to the next frequency up the band (whether or not
a listenable station is located there). Hold for quick movement.

Tape/CD select
To begin tape play (with a tape
loaded into the audio system) TAPE CD
while in the radio or CD mode,
press the TAPE control. Press the
button during rewind or fast forward to stop the rewind or fast
forward function.
To begin CD play (if CD is
loaded), press the CD control. TAPE CD
The first track of the disc will
begin playing. If returning from
radio or tape mode, CD play will begin where it stopped last.
CD units are designed to play commercially pressed 12 cm
(4.75 in) audio compact discs only. Due to technical
incompatibility, certain recordable and re-recordable compact
discs may not function correctly when used in Ford CD players.
Irregular shaped CDs, CDs with a scratch protection film
attached, and CDs with homemade paper (adhesive) labels should
not be inserted into the CD player. The label may peel and cause
the CD to become jammed. It is recommended that homemade
CDs be identified with permanent felt tip marker rather than
adhesive labels. Ball point pens may damage CDs. Please contact
your dealer for further information.

35
Entertainment Systems
Rewind
The rewind control works in tape
and CD modes. REW

In tape mode, radio play will 1


continue until rewind is stopped
(with the TAPE control) or the beginning of the tape is reached.
In CD mode, pressing the REW control rewinds the CD within the
current track.

Fast forward
The fast forward control works in
tape and CD modes. FF

In the tape mode, tape direction


2
will automatically reverse when
the end of the tape is reached.
In CD mode, pressing the FF control fast forwards the CD within the
current track.

Tape direction select


Press to play the alternate side of
the tape. SIDE 1-2
3

Eject function
Press the EJ control to stop and
eject a tape. EJ

Press the EJ control to stop and


eject a CD.
EJ

36
Entertainment Systems
DolbyT noise reduction
Dolbyt noise reduction operates in
tape mode. Dolbyt noise reduction
reduces the amount of hiss and 4
static during tape playback.
Press the control to activate (and deactivate) the Dolbyt noise
reduction.
Dolbyt noise reduction is manufactured under license from Dolbyt
Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Dolbyt and the double-D
symbol are registered trademarks of Dolbyt Laboratories Licensing
Corporation.

Compression adjust
Compression adjust brings soft and
loud CD passages together for a COMP
more consistent listening level. 5
Press the COMP control to activate
and deactivate compression adjust.

Shuffle feature
The shuffle feature operates in CD
mode and plays all tracks in random SHUFFLE
order. 6
Press the SHUFFLE control to start
this feature. Random order play will continue until the SHUFFLE control
is pressed again.

Mute mode
Press the MUTE control to mute the
playing media. Press the MUTE
control again to return to the EJ
playing media.

MUTE

37
Entertainment Systems
PREMIUM AM/FM STEREO IN DASH SIX CD RADIO

SHUF SCAN DISC SEEK REW FF COMP


TUNE MUTE

LOAD EJ

BASS BAL
SEL
TREB FADE
PUSH ON

AM
FM
CD 1 2 3 4 5 6 MENU

Your vehicle is equipped with a delayed accessory feature. This feature


enables the audio playing media to continue playing up to 10 minutes
after the ignition has been turned off, or until a door is opened.

Volume/power control
Press the control to turn the audio
system on or off.

PUSH ON

Turn the control to raise or lower


volume.

PUSH ON

If the volume is set above a certain level and the ignition is turned off,
the volume will come back on at a nominal listening level when the
ignition switch is turned back on.

38
Entertainment Systems
Bass adjust
The bass adjust control allows you
BASS
to increase or decrease the audio
systems bass output. + SEL
TREB
Press the BASS control. Use the
SEL control to increase or decrease
the amount of bass.
Treble adjust
The treble adjust control allows you
BASS
to increase or decrease the audio
systems treble output. + SEL
TREB
Press the TREB control. Use the
SEL control to increase or decrease
the amount of treble.
Speaker balance adjust
Speaker sound distribution can be
BAL
adjusted between the right and left
speakers. + SEL

Press the BAL control. Use the SEL FADE


control to adjust the sound between
the left and right speakers.
Speaker fade adjust
Speaker sound can be adjusted
BAL
between the front and rear
speakers. + SEL

Press the FADE control. Use the FADE


SEL control to adjust the sound
between the front and rear speakers.

39
Entertainment Systems
Seek function
The seek function works in radio or CD mode.
Seek function in radio mode
Press to find the next
listenable station down the
frequency band. SEEK DOWN
will display.
Press to find the next listenable station up the frequency band.
SEEK UP will display.

Seek function in CD mode


Press to seek to the previous
track of the current disc. If the
beginning of the disc is reached,
the CD player seeks to the
beginning of the last track on the current disc and begins playing.
Press to seek forward to the next track of the current disc. After
the last track has been completed, the first track of the current disc
will automatically replay.

Scan function
The scan function works in radio or
CD mode.

Scan function in radio mode


Press the SCAN control to hear a brief sampling of all listenable stations
on the frequency band. Press the SCAN control again to stop the scan
mode.
Scan function in CD mode
Press the SCAN control to hear a short sampling of all selections on the
CD. (The CD scans in a forward direction, wrapping back to the first
track at the end of the CD.) To stop on a particular selection, press the
control again.

40
Entertainment Systems
AM/FM select
The AM/FM select control works in AM
radio and CD modes. CD
FM

AM/FM select in radio mode


This control allows you to select AM or FM frequency bands. Press the
control to switch between AM, FM1 or FM2 memory preset stations.
AM/FM select in CD mode
Press this control to stop CD play and begin radio play.
Radio station memory preset
The radio is equipped with six station memory preset controls. These
controls can be used to select up to six preset AM stations and twelve
FM stations (six in FM1 and six in FM2).
Setting memory preset stations
1. Select the frequency band with the AM/FM select control. Press the
AM/FM control to toggle between AM, FM1, or FM2.
2. Press the SEEK control to access the next listenable station up or
down the frequency band. Press the TUNE control to go up or down the
listening band in individual increments.
3. Select a station. Refer to Seek function for more information on
selecting a station.
4. Press and hold a memory preset control. The playing media will mute
momentarily. When the sound returns, the station is held in memory on
the control you selected. The display will read SAVED.

Autostore
Autostore allows you to set the strongest local radio stations without
losing your original manually set preset stations. This feature is helpful
on trips when you travel between cities with different radio stations.
Starting autostore
1. Press and momentarily hold the AM/FM control.

41
Entertainment Systems
2. AUTOSET will flash in the display AM
as the frequency band is scrolled CD
FM
through.
3. When the six strongest stations are filled, the station stored in
memory preset control 1 will start playing.
If there are fewer than six strong stations available on the frequency
band, the remaining memory preset controls will all store the last strong
station available.
To deactivate autoset and return to your audio systems manually set
memory stations, press the AM/FM control again.

Setting the clock


Press the MENU control until
SELECT HOUR or SELECT
MINUTE is displayed. (The menu
mode must be engaged to enable
clock mode).
Use the SEL control to manually set
the time.
Press to increase SEL
hours/minutes.
Press to decrease
hours/minutes.
Press the MENU control again to disengage the clock mode.

Tune/disc adjust
The tune control works in radio or CD mode.
Tune adjust in radio mode
Press to move to the next DISC
TUNE
frequency down the band
(whether or not a listenable
station is located there). Hold the control to move through the
frequencies quickly.
Press to move to the next frequency up the band (whether or not
a listenable station is located there). Hold for quick movement.

42
Entertainment Systems
Disc adjust for CD mode
Press to select the previous DISC
TUNE
disc. (Play will begin on the first
track of the disc unless shuffle
mode is engaged.) Refer to Shuffle feature for more information. Hold
the control to continue reversing through the discs.
Press to select the next disc. Hold the control to fast-forward
through the remaining discs.
CD select
CD mode may be entered by AM
pressing the CD control and the CD
FM
LOAD control. Load the CD into the
audio system. The first track of the
disc will begin playing. After that, CD play will begin where it stopped
last.
If an alternative CD is desired, press the corresponding preset control
(16) of a loaded CD, or press the TUNE control to access the other
loaded CDs.
NO CD will display if the CD control is activated when there is not a CD
present in the audio system.
NO CD will illuminate in the display if the CD control and a present
number (that is currently empty) are pressed. The system will play the
next available disc.
CD units are designed to play commercially pressed 12 cm
(4.75 in) audio compact discs only. Due to technical
incompatibility, certain recordable and re-recordable compact
discs may not function correctly when used in Ford CD players.
Irregular shaped CDs, CDs with a scratch protection film
attached, and CDs with homemade paper (adhesive) labels should
not be inserted into the CD player. The label may peel and cause
the CD to become jammed. It is recommended that homemade
CDs be identified with permanent felt tip marker rather than
adhesive labels. Ball point pens may damage CDs. Please contact
your dealer for further information.
Display description
Six circles are always lit in the digital display. These signify the six CD
slots in the audio system. When a disc is loaded into a particular slot
(16), the number inside that specific circle lights. If the circle is empty,
there is no CD in that particular slot.

43
Entertainment Systems
Rewind
The rewind control works in CD
REW FF
modes.
Press and hold the REW control
until the desired selection is reached. If the beginning of the disc is
reached, the CD will begin play at the first track. Release the control to
disengage rewind mode.
When in rewind mode, your audio system will automatically lower the
volume level of the playing media.

Fast forward
The fast forward control works in
REW FF
CD modes.
Press and hold the FF control until
the desired selection is reached. If the end of the disc is reached, the CD
will return to the first track. Release the control to disengage fast
forward mode.
When in fast forward mode, your audio system will automatically lower
the volume level of the playing media.

Load
The load feature allows you to load LOAD
single CDs into the player internal
to the radio.
This six disc CD player is equipped with a CD door. Compact
discs should only be inserted into the player after the door has
been opened by the player. Do not attempt to force the door
open. Compact discs should only be loaded by pressing the LOAD
control.
Press the LOAD control. (You can choose which slot will be loaded by
pressing the desired preset number. If you do not choose a slot, the
system will choose the next available one.) Wait until the CD door opens.
Load the CD into the player. LOADING CD# is displayed. When the CD
has been loaded, the door will close and the CD will begin to play. For
example, to load a CD into slot 2, press the LOAD control and then press
preset 2.

44
Entertainment Systems
Auto load
This feature allows you to autoload LOAD
up to 6 discs into the multi disc CD
player internal to the radio.
Press and hold the LOAD control until AUTOLOAD # is displayed. The
CD door will open. Load the desired disc, one at a time. The CD is
loaded into position and the audio system will display CD#. Each time
the CD door opens, INSERT CD# is displayed. The door will close and
the player will move to the next slot after each disc has been loaded.
The process is repeated until all 6 slots are full. The audio system plays
the last CD loaded and the display is updated. If some slots are already
full and autoload is activated, the system will fill all empty slots.
Eject
Press the EJ control to stop and
EJ
eject a CD. You can choose which
CD will be ejected by pressing the
EJ control and the desired preset number (16). For example, to eject
CD 2, press the EJ control and then press the preset 2 control. If you do
not choose a specific CD, the player will eject the current CD.
If a CD is ejected and not removed from the door of the CD player, the
player will automatically reload the CD. This feature may be used when
the ignition is ON or OFF.
Auto eject
Press and momentarily hold the EJ
EJ
control to engage auto eject. All CDs
which are present in the player will
be ejected one at a time. If a CD is ejected and not removed from the
door of the CD player, the player will automatically reload the CD. This
feature may be used when the ignition is ON or OFF.
Shuffle feature
Press the SHUF control until the
desired shuffle mode is displayed.
The audio system will then engage
the desired shuffle mode.
When engaged, the shuffle feature has two different modes: SHUFFLE
DISC and SHUFFLE TRK.
SHUFFLE DISC randomly plays tracks from all the discs presently in the
audio system.

45
Entertainment Systems
SHUFFLE TRK plays all the tracks on the current disc in random order.
Compression feature
The compression feature operates in CD mode and brings soft and loud
CD passages together for a more consistent listening level.
Press the COMP control until COMP
ON is displayed.

Menu mode
The MENU control allows you to
access many different features
within your audio system. There are
three sets of menus available
depending upon which mode or feature is activated.
While in FM mode, two menus are available. If RDS is turned OFF, you
can access the following:
SELECT HOURS Refer to Setting the clock.
SELECT MINUTES Refer to Setting the clock.
RDS OFF Refer to Radio data system feature.
If RDS is turned ON, you can access the following:
TRAFFIC ON/OFF-Refer to Traffic announcements.
FIND type-Refer to Program type.
SHOW (NAME, TYPE, NONE)- Refer to Radio data system feature.
RDS ON Refer to Radio data system feature.
SELECT HOURS Refer to Setting the clock.
SELECT MINUTES Refer to Setting the clock.
When in CD mode, you can access: SELECT HOURS, SELECT MINUTES
or COMP ON/OFF.
SELECT HOURS, SELECT MINUTES Allows you to adjust the hours
and minutes. Refer to Setting the clock.
TRAFFIC ON/OFF Traffic announcements can be programmed as local
or distant. Refer to Traffic announcements.
RDS ON/OFF This feature allows your audio system to receive text
information from RDS-equipped FM radio stations. Refer to Radio Data
System feature.

46
Entertainment Systems
FIND type Allows you to select your desired FM program type and
search for that selection.
SHOW Allows you to select from NAME (displays the name of the
radio station), TYPE (displays the RDS program type: rock, jazz, etc.), or
NONE (deactivates the RDS display).
Radio data system (RDS) feature
This feature allows your audio
system to receive text information
from RDS-equipped FM radio MENU + SEL
stations.
To activate RDS:
When in FM mode, press the MENU control until RDS OFF displays.
Press the SEL control to engage this feature (RDS ON).
RDS features:
Once the RDS feature is on, press the MENU control to scroll through
the following selections:
Traffic announcements
This feature allows you to hear traffic announcements while in CD mode.
These announcements are broadcast by traffic capable RDS stations.
When in this mode, traffic announcements will interrupt radio and CD
play.
Press the MENU control until TRAFFIC is displayed.
Press the SEL control to engage the feature. The display will read
TRAFFIC ON.
This feature also allows you to control the volume of traffic
announcements. With the display reading TRAFFIC ON, adjust the
volume using the volume control to the desired level. The volume level
will show at the bottom of the display. Interrupting traffic
announcements will be at the selected volume level.
To disengage the feature, press the MENU control until TRAFFIC ON
displays. Press the SEL control. The display will read TRAFFIC OFF.
Traffic announcements are not available in most U.S. markets.
Program type
This feature allows you to search for RDS stations selectively by their
program type.

47
Entertainment Systems
Press the MENU control until FIND
program type is displayed.
Use the SEL control to select the
MENU + SEL
program type. With the feature on,
use the SEEK or SCAN control to
find the desired program type from the following selections:
Classic
Country
Info
Jazz
Oldies
R&B
Religious
Rock
Soft
Top 40
Show
This feature allows you to select the
type of RDS broadcast information
the radio will regularly show in the MENU + SEL
display.

With RDS activated, press the


MENU control until SHOW is
displayed. MENU + SEL
Use the SEL control to select TYPE
(displays the RDS program type:
rock, jazz, etc), NAME (displays the name of the radio station) or NONE
(deactivates the RDS display).
Mute mode
Press the control to mute the
playing media. Press the control
again to return to the playing media.

48
Entertainment Systems
CLEANING COMPACT DISCS
Inspect all discs for contamination before playing. If necessary, clean
discs only with an approved CD cleaner and wipe from the center out to
the edge. Do not use circular motion.
CD AND CD CHANGER CARE
Handle discs by their edges only. Never touch the playing surface.
Do not expose discs to direct sunlight or heat sources for extended
periods of time.
Do not insert more than one disc into each slot of the CD changer
magazine.
CD units are designed to play commercially pressed 12 cm (4.75
in) audio compact discs only. Due to technical incompatibility,
certain recordable and re-recordable compact discs may not
function correctly when used in Ford CD players. Irregular
shaped CDs, CDs with a scratch protection film attached, and CDs
with homemade paper (adhesive) labels should not be inserted
into the CD player. The label may peel and cause the CD to
become jammed. It is recommended that homemade CDs be
identified with permanent felt tip marker rather than adhesive
labels. Ball point pens may damage CDs. Please contact your
dealer for further information.
CASSETTE AND CASSETTE PLAYER CARE
Use only cassettes that are 90 minutes long or less.
Do not expose tapes to direct sunlight, high humidity, extreme heat or
extreme cold. Allow tapes that may have been exposed to extreme
temperatures to reach a moderate temperature before playing.
Tighten very loose tapes by inserting a finger or pencil into the hole
and turning the hub.
Remove loose labels before inserting tapes.
Do not leave tapes in the cassette player for a long time when not
being played.

49
Entertainment Systems
RADIO FREQUENCY INFORMATION
The Federal Communications Commission (FCC) and the Canadian Radio
and Telecommunications Commission (CRTC) establish the frequencies
AM and FM stations may use for their broadcasts. Allowable frequencies
are:
AM 530, 5401600, 1610 kHza
FM 87.9b, 88.1107.7, 107.9 MHz
Not all frequencies are used in a given area.
a
Some radios may tune up to 1710 kHz.
b
Some radios may tune down to 87.7 MHz.
RADIO RECEPTION FACTORS
Three factors can affect radio reception:
Distance/strength. The further an FM signal travels, the weaker it is.
The listenable range of the average FM station is approximately 40 km
(24 miles). This range can be affected by signal modulation. Signal
modulation is a process radio stations use to increase their
strength/volume relative to other stations.
Terrain. Hills, mountains and tall buildings between your vehicles
antenna and the radio station signal can cause FM reception problems.
Static can be caused on AM stations by power lines, electric fences,
traffic lights and thunderstorms. Moving away from an interfering
structure (out of its shadow) returns your reception to normal.
Station overload. Weak signals are sometimes captured by stronger
signals when you pass a broadcast tower. A stronger signal may
temporarily overtake a weaker signal and play while the weak station
frequency is displayed.
The audio system automatically switches to single channel reception if it
will improve the reception of a station normally received in stereo.
AUDIO SYSTEM WARRANTIES AND SERVICE
Refer to the Warranty Guide for audio system warranty information.
If service is necessary, see your dealer or a qualified technician.

50
Climate Controls
HEATER ONLY SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
OFF

Fan speed control


Controls the volume of air circulated
in the vehicle.

Temperature control knob


Controls the temperature of the
airflow inside the vehicle. On
heater-only systems, the air cannot
be cooled below the outside
temperature.

Mode selector control


Controls the direction of the airflow OFF

to the inside of the vehicle.

(Panel) Distributes outside air through the instrument panel


registers.
OFF Outside air is shut out and the fan will not operate. For short
periods of time only, use this mode to prevent undesirable odors from
entering the vehicle.
(Panel and floor) Distributes outside air through the
instrument panel registers and the floor ducts.
(Floor) Distributes outside air through the floor ducts.
(Floor and defrost) Distributes outside air through the floor
ducts and the windshield defroster ducts.
(Defrost) Distributes outside air through the windshield
defroster ducts. It can be used to clear ice or fog from the windshield.

51
Climate Controls
Operating tips
In humid weather, place the climate control system in DEF before
driving. This will reduce fogging on your windshield. Once the
windshield has been cleared, select any desired position.
To reduce humidity buildup inside the vehicle, do not drive with the
climate control system in the OFF position.
Under normal weather conditions, your vehicles climate control
system should be left in any position other than OFF position when
the vehicle is parked. This allows the vehicle to breathe through the
outside air inlet duct.
Under snowy or dirty weather conditions, your vehicles climate
control system should be left in the OFF position when the vehicle is
parked. This allows the climate control system to be free from
contamination of outside pollutants.
Do not place objects under the front seat which may interfere with
the airflow to the rear seats.
Remove any snow, ice, or leaves from the air intake area (at the base
of the windshield and underneath the hood).
Do not place objects over the defroster outlets. These objects may
block airflow and reduce your visibility through the windshield. Avoid
placing small objects on top of the instrument panel. These objects
can fall into the defroster outlets and block airflow, in addition to,
damaging your climate control system.
Do not place objects on top of the instrument panel, as these
objects may become projectiles in a collision or sudden stop.

52
Climate Controls
MANUAL HEATING AND AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
OFF

A/C

MAX
A/C

Fan speed control


Controls the volume of air circulated
in the vehicle.

Temperature control knob


Controls the temperature of the
airflow inside the vehicle.

Mode Selector Control


Controls the direction of the airflow OFF

A/C
to the inside of the vehicle. MAX
A/C

The air conditioning compressor can operate in all modes except


and . However, the air conditioning will only function if the outside
temperature is about 6C (43F) or higher.
Since the air conditioner removes considerable moisture from the air
during operation, it is normal if clear water drips on the ground under
the air conditioner drain while the system is working and even after you
have stopped the vehicle.
MAX A/C Uses recirculated air to cool the vehicle. MAX A/C is
noisier than A/C but more economical and will cool the inside of the
vehicle faster. Airflow will be from the instrument panel registers. This
mode can also be used to prevent undesirable odors from entering the
vehicle.
A/C Uses outside air to cool the vehicle. It is quieter than MAX A/C
but not as economical. Airflow will be from the instrument panel
registers.

53
Climate Controls
(Panel) Distributes outside air through the instrument panel
registers. However, the air will not be cooled below the outside
temperature because the air conditioning does not operate in this
mode.
OFF Outside air is shut out and the fan will not operate. For short
periods of time only, use this mode to prevent undesirable odors from
entering the vehicle.
(Panel and floor) Distributes outside air through the
instrument panel registers and the floor ducts. Heating and air
conditioning capabilities are provided in this mode. For added
customer comfort, when the temperature control knob is anywhere in
between the full hot and full cold positions, the air distributed through
the floor ducts will be slightly warmer than the air sent to the
instrument panel registers.
(Floor) Distributes outside air through the floor ducts.
However, the air will not be cooled below the outside temperature
because the air conditioning does not operate in this mode.
(Floor and defrost) Distributes outside air through the
windshield defroster ducts and the floor ducts. Heating and air
conditioning capabilities are provided in this mode. For added
customer comfort, the air distributed through the floor ducts will be
slightly warmer than the air sent to the windshield defroster ducts. If
the temperature is about 6C (43F) or higher, the air conditioner will
automatically dehumidify the air to reduce fogging.
(Defrost) Distributes outside air through the windshield
defroster ducts. It can be used to clear ice or fog from the windshield.
If the temperature is about 6C (43F) or higher, the air conditioner
will automatically dehumidify the air to reduce fogging.
Operating tips
In humid weather conditions, place the climate control system in
Defrost mode before driving. This will reduce fogging on your
windshield. Once the windshield has been cleared, operate the climate
control system as desired.
To reduce humidity buildup inside the vehicle in cold weather
conditions, dont drive with the climate control system in the OFF or
MAX A/C position.
To reduce humidity buildup inside the vehicle in warm weather
conditions, dont drive with the climate control system in the OFF
position.

54
Climate Controls
Under normal weather conditions, your vehicles climate control
system should be left in any position other than the MAX A/C or OFF
when the vehicle is parked. This allows the vehicle to breathe
through the outside air inlet duct.
Under snowy or dirty weather conditions, your vehicles climate
control system should be left in the OFF position when the vehicle is
parked. This allows the climate control system to be free from
contamination of outside pollutants.
If your vehicle has been parked with the windows closed during warm
weather conditions, the air conditioner will perform more efficiently in
cooling the vehicle if driven for two or three minutes with the
windows open. This will force most of the hot, stale air out of the
vehicle. Once the vehicle has been aired out, operate the climate
control system as desired.
Do not put objects under the front seat which may interfere with the
airflow to the rear seats (if equipped).
Remove any snow, ice or leaves from the air intake area (at the
bottom of the windshield and underneath the hood).
Do not place objects over the defroster outlets. These objects can
block airflow and reduce visibility through your windshield. Avoid
placing small objects on top of the instrument panel. These objects
may fall down into the defroster outlets and block airflow, in addition
to, damaging the climate control system.
To aid in side window defogging/demisting in cold weather conditions:
1. Select the position that distributes air through the Panel and Floor.
2. Set the temperature control to full heat.
3. Set the fan speed to full fan.
4. Direct the outer panel vents towards the side windows.
5. To increase airflow to the outer panel vents, close the central panel
vents.
Do not place objects on top of the instrument panel as these
objects may become projectiles in a collision or sudden stop.

55
Lights
HEADLAMP CONTROL
Rotate the headlamp control to the
first position to turn on the parking
lamps. Rotate to the second position
to turn on the headlamps.

Autolamp control (if equipped)


The autolamp system provides light
sensitive automatic on-off control of A

the exterior lights normally


controlled by the headlamp control.
The autolamp system also keeps the
lights on for approximately 20
seconds after the ignition switch is
turned to OFF.
To change the delay time of the autolamp feature, do the following:
1. Start with the ignition in OFF and the autolamps selected.
2. Deselect the autolamps.
3. Put the ignition in RUN.
4. Put the ignition in OFF.
5. Select the autolamps. Steps 2 through 5 must be performed within a
10 second period. At this point, the headlamps and parking lamps will
turn on.
6. Deselect the autolamps after the desired autolamp delay time
(maximum of 3 minutes). At this point, the headlamps and parking
lamps will turn off.

56
Lights
Foglamp control (if equipped)
The headlamp control also operates
the foglamps. The foglamps can be A

turned on only when the headlamp


control is in the and
position and the high beams are not
turned on.
Pull headlamp control towards you
to turn foglamps on. The foglamp
indicator light will illuminate if the ignition is in the RUN position.

Daytime running lamps (DRL) (if equipped)


Turns the headlamps on with a reduced output. To activate:
the ignition must be in the ON position and
the headlamp control is in the OFF or Parking lamps position.
Always remember to turn on your headlamps at dusk or during
inclement weather. The Daytime Running Lamp (DRL) system
does not activate with your tail lamps and generally may not provide
adequate lighting during these conditions. Failure to activate your
headlamps under these conditions may result in a collision.

High beams
Push forward past detent to
activate.
Pull toward you past detent to
deactivate.

57
Lights
Flash to pass
Pull toward you slightly to activate
and release to deactivate.

PANEL DIMMER CONTROL


Use to adjust the brightness of the
instrument panel during headlamp
and parklamp operation.
Rotate up to brighten.
Rotate down to dim.
Rotate to full up position (past
detent/dome defeat) to turn on
interior lamps.
Rotate to full down position (past detent/dome defeat) to turn off
interior lamps.

AIMING THE HEADLAMPS


The headlamps on your vehicle are properly aimed at the assembly plant.
If your vehicle has been in an accident the alignment of your headlamps
should be checked by a qualified service technician.

58
Lights
TURN SIGNAL CONTROL
Push down to activate the left
turn signal.
Push up to activate the right turn
signal.

COURTESY/READING LAMPS
The courtesy lamp lights when:
any door is opened.
the instrument panel dimmer
switch is held up until the
courtesy lamps come on.
the remote entry controls are
pressed and the ignition is OFF.
The reading lamps can be turned on
by pressing the rocker controls next to each lamp.
BULBS
Replacing exterior bulbs
Check the operation of the following lamps frequently:
Headlamps
High-mount brakelamp
Brakelamps
Turn signal lamps
License plate lamp
Tail lamps
Back-up lamps
Do not remove lamp bulbs unless they can be replaced immediately with
new ones. If a bulb is removed for an extended period of time,
contaminants may enter the lamp housings and affect lamp performance.

59
Lights
Using the right bulbs
Replacement bulbs are specified in the chart below. Headlamp bulbs
must be marked with an authorized D.O.T. for North America and an
E for Europe to assure lamp performance, light brightness and pattern
and safe visibility. The correct bulbs will not damage the lamp assembly
or void the lamp assembly warranty and will provide quality bulb burn
time.
Function Number of Trade number
bulbs
Headlamps (aerodynamic) 2 9007
Headlamps (sealed beam) 2 H6054
Park/turn 2 3157
Sidemarker 2 194
Tail/stop/turn/sidemarker 2 3157 K
Backup 2 3156K
High-mount stoplamp 1 921
Foglamp 2 899
License plate lamp 2 168
Cargo lamp 2 906
Roofmarker 5 194
(a)
Rear fender clearance 4
Interior visor lamp (if equipped) 4 194
Rear identification 3 194
All replacement bulbs are clear in color except where noted.
To replace all instrument panel lights - see your dealer
(a)
Replace entire lamp assembly; bulb is not serviceable.

Replacing headlamp bulbs (aerodynamic)


1. Make sure that the headlamp control is in the OFF position.
2. Open the hood.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector from the bulb by pulling rearward.

60
Lights
4. Remove bulb retainer ring by
turning it counterclockwise, then
slide the ring off the plastic base.
5. Without turning, carefully pull
bulb out of headlamp assembly.

Handle a halogen headlamp bulb carefully and keep out of


childrens reach. Grasp the bulb only by its plastic base and do
not touch the glass. The oil from your hand could cause the bulb to
break the next time the headlamps are operated.

6. Insert the glass end of the new bulb into the headlamp assembly.
When the grooves in the plastic base are aligned, push the bulb into the
lamp assembly until the plastic base contacts the rear of the lamp
assembly.
7. Install bulb retaining ring over the plastic base and lock the ring into
the socket by turning it clockwise until you feel a stop.
8. Connect the electrical connector into the rear of the plastic base until
it snaps.
Replacing headlamp bulbs (sealed beam)
To remove the headlamp bulb:
1. Make sure headlamp switch is in OFF position.
2. Open the hood.
3. Remove the two screws and
parking lamp/side marker assembly
by pulling gently
4. Disconnect the electrical
connectors from the parking
lamp/side marker assembly and
remove.

61
Lights
5. Remove the four bolts and
headlamp bezel.

6. Remove the four screws and the


headlamp retaining ring from
headlamp.
7. Disconnect the electrical
connector and remove headlamp.

To install the new headlamp, reverse the removal procedure.


Replacing front parking/turn signal bulbs
1. Make sure headlamp switch is in OFF position.
2. Open the hood.
3. Remove the two screws and
carefully disengage parking
lamp/turn signal assembly from the
vehicle.

62
Lights
4. Rotate bulb socket
counterclockwise about 14 turn and
remove from lamp assembly.

5. Carefully pull bulb straight out of


the socket and push in the new
bulb.
6. Install the bulb socket in lamp
assembly by turning clockwise.
7. Align the lamp assembly on the
vehicle.
8. Install two screws on parking
lamp/turn signal assembly.

Replacing tail lamp/turn/backup lamp bulbs F250/F350 only


The tail lamp/backup lamp bulbs are
located in the same portion of the
tail lamp assembly, one just below
the other. Follow the same steps to
replace either bulb:
1. Open the tailgate to expose the
lamp assemblies.
2. Remove the two bolts from the
tail lamp assembly.
3. Carefully pull the lamp assembly
from the tailgate pillar by releasing
the two retaining tabs.
4. Twist the bulb socket 14 turn counterclockwise and remove from lamp
assembly.
5. Pull the bulb straight out of the socket and push in the new bulb.
6. Install bulb socket in lamp assembly by turning clockwise.

63
Lights
7. Carefully install the tail lamp assembly on tailgate pillar snapping the
two retaining tabs into place.
8. Secure the tail lamp with two bolts.
Replacing brake/tail/backup lamp bulbs F450/F550 only
The brake/tail/backup lamp bulbs
are located in the same portion of
the tail lamp assembly. Follow the
same steps to replace either bulb:
1. Remove the four screws and the
lamp lens from lamp assembly.
2. Carefully pull the bulb straight
out of the socket and push in the
new bulb.
3. Install the lens on the lamp
assembly with the four screws.

Replacing cargo lamp and high-mount brakelamp bulbs


To remove the lamp assembly:
1. Remove the two screws and lamp
assembly from vehicle as wiring
permits.
2. Remove the bulb socket by
rotating counterclockwise and
pulling it out of the lamp assembly.
3. Pull the bulb straight out of the
socket and push in the new bulb.
To install the brakelamp assembly:
1. Install the bulb into the lamp
assembly and rotate clockwise.
2. Install the lamp assembly on the vehicle with two screws.

64
Lights
Replacing roof marker bulbs
To change the cab marker bulbs:
1. Remove the screw and lens from
the lamp assembly.
2. Carefully pull the bulb straight
out of the socket and push in the
new bulb.
3. Install lens on lamp assembly with
screw.

Replacing foglamp bulbs (if equipped)


1. Remove the bulb socket from the
foglamp by turning
counterclockwise.
2. Disconnect the electrical
connector from the foglamp bulb.
3. Connect the new foglamp bulb to the electrical connector.
4. Install the bulb socket in the foglamp by turning clockwise.
Replacing license plate lamp bulbs
The license plate bulbs are located
behind the rear bumper. To change
the license plate lamp bulbs:
1. Reach behind the rear bumper to
locate the bulb.
2. Twist the bulb socket
counterclockwise and carefully pull
to remove it from the lamp
assembly.
3. Pull out the old bulb from the
socket and push in the new bulb.
4. Install the bulb socket in lamp assembly by turning it clockwise.

65
Driver Controls
WINDSHIELD WIPER/WASHER CONTROLS
Rotate the windshield wiper control
to the desired interval, low or high
speed position.
The bars of varying length are for
intermittent wipers. When in this
position rotate the control upward
for fast intervals and downward for
slow intervals.
Push (tap) the end of the stalk
briefly for a single swipe (no wash).
Push and hold the end of the stalk
to activate washer. The wash cycle
will continue for up to ten seconds
or until released. After release,
there will be three clearing wipes.
Windshield wiper blades
Check the wiper blades for wear at least twice a year or when they seem
less effective. Substances such as tree sap and some hot wax treatments
used by commercial car washes reduce the effectiveness of wiper blades.
Checking the wiper blades
If the wiper blades do not wipe properly, clean both the windshield and
wiper blades using undiluted windshield wiper solution or a mild
detergent. Rinse thoroughly with clean water. To avoid damaging the
blades, do not use fuel, kerosene, paint thinner or other solvents.

66
Driver Controls
Changing the wiper blades
To replace the wiper blades:
1. Pull the wiper arm away from the
windshield and lock into the service
position.
2. Turn the blade at an angle from
the wiper arm. Push the lock pin
manually to release the blade and
pull the wiper blade down toward
the windshield to remove it from the
arm.
3. Attach the new wiper to the
wiper arm and press it into place
until a click is heard.

TILT STEERING WHEEL (IF EQUIPPED)


Pull the tilt steering control toward
you to move the steering wheel up
or down. Hold the control while
adjusting the wheel to the desired
position, then release the control to
lock the steering wheel in position.

Never adjust the steering wheel when the vehicle is moving.

67
Driver Controls
ILLUMINATED VISOR MIRROR (IF EQUIPPED)
To turn on the visor mirror lamps,
lift the mirror cover open.

OVERHEAD CONSOLE (IF EQUIPPED)


The appearance of your vehicles overhead console will vary according to
your option package.

Storage compartment (if equipped)


Press the OPEN control to open the
storage compartment. The door will
open slightly and can be moved to
full open.
The storage compartment may be
used to secure sunglasses or a
similar object.

Installing a garage door opener (if equipped)


The storage compartment can be converted to accommodate a variety of
aftermarket garage door openers:
1. Remove the storage clip from the
door.
2. Place Velcro hook onto side of
aftermarket transmitter opposite of
actuator control.
3. Place the transmitter into storage
compartment, control down.

68
Driver Controls
4. Place the provided height
adaptors onto the back of the
GARAGE control as needed.
5. Press the GARAGE control to
activate the transmitter.

AUXILIARY POWER POINT


Power outlets are designed for
accessory plugs only. Do not POWER POINT

hang any type of accessory or


accessory bracket from the plug.
Improper use of the power
outlet can cause damage not
covered by your warranty.
The auxiliary power point is located
on the instrument panel.
Do not plug optional electrical accessories into the cigarette
lighter. Use the power point.

POWER WINDOWS (IF EQUIPPED)


Press and hold the rocker switches to open and close windows.
Press the top portion of the
rocker switch to close.

AUTO

69
Driver Controls
Press the bottom portion of the
rocker switch to open.

AUTO

One touch down


Press AUTO completely down and
release quickly. The drivers
window will open fully. Depress
again to stop window operation.
One touch down can be deactivated
during operation by pushing down AUTO
on the top part of the driver power
window control.

Window lock (if equipped)


The window lock feature allows only
the driver to operate the power
windows.
To lock out all the window controls
except for the drivers press the left
side of the control. Press the right
side to restore the window controls.
Accessory delay (if equipped)
With accessory delay, the window switches may be used for up to ten
minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position or until
any door is opened.

70
Driver Controls
POWER SIDE VIEW MIRRORS (IF EQUIPPED)
The ignition can be in any position to adjust the power side view mirrors.
To adjust your mirrors:
1. Select L to adjust the left mirror
or R to adjust the right mirror.
MIRRORS
L R

2. Move the control in the direction


you wish to tilt the mirror. MIRRORS
L R

3. Return to the center position to lock mirrors in place.


4. Adjust spotter mirrors (if equipped) manually.
Fold-away mirrors

71
Driver Controls
Fold the side mirrors in carefully when driving through a narrow space,
like an automatic car wash.
The telescoping feature (if equipped) allows the mirror to extend
approximately 76 mm (3 inches).

POWER ADJUSTABLE FOOT PEDALS (IF EQUIPPED)


The accelerator and brake pedal
should only be adjusted when the
vehicle is stopped and the gearshift
lever is in the P(Park) position.
Press and hold the rocker control to
adjust accelerator and brake pedal
toward you or away from you.

The adjustment allows for approximately 76 mm (3 inches) of maximum


travel.
Never adjust the accelerator and brake pedal with feet on pedals
or while the vehicle is moving.

SPEED CONTROL (IF EQUIPPED)

To turn speed control on


Press ON.
Vehicle speed cannot be controlled
until the vehicle is traveling at or
above 48 km/h (30 mph). ON

Do not shift the gearshift lever


into N (Neutral) with the speed OFF
control on.
Do not use the speed
control in heavy traffic or
on roads that are winding,
slippery, or unpaved.

72
Driver Controls
To turn speed control off
Press OFF or
Turn off the vehicle ignition.
Once speed control is switched off, ON
the previously programmed set
speed will be erased.
OFF

To set a speed
Press SET ACCEL. For speed
control to operate, the speed
control must be ON and the RES
vehicle speed must be greater
than 48 km/h (30 mph). SET
ACCEL

COAST

If you drive up or down a steep hill, your vehicle speed may vary
momentarily slower or faster than the set speed. This is normal.
Speed control cannot reduce the vehicle speed if it increases above the
set speed on a downhill. If your vehicle speed is faster than the set
speed while driving on a downhill, you may want to shift to the next
lower gear or apply the brakes to reduce your vehicle speed.
If your vehicle slows down more than 16 km/h (10 mph) below your set
speed on an uphill, your speed control will disengage. This is normal.
Pressing RES will re-engage it.
Do not use the speed control in heavy traffic or on roads that
are winding, slippery, or unpaved.

73
Driver Controls
To set a higher set speed
Press and hold SET ACCEL.
Release the control when the
desired vehicle speed is reached RES
or
Press and release SET ACCEL to SET
ACCEL
operate the Tap-Up function.
Each press will increase the set
speed by 1.6 km/h (1 mph) or COAST

Accelerate with your accelerator


pedal. When the desired vehicle
speed is reached, press and release SET ACCEL.
You can accelerate with the accelerator pedal at any time during speed
control usage. Releasing the accelerator pedal will return your vehicle to
the previously programmed set speed.

To set a lower set speed


Press and hold COAST. Release
the control when the desired
speed is reached or RES
Press and release COAST to
operate the Tap-Down function. SET
ACCEL
Each press will decrease the set
speed by 1.6 km/h (1 mph) or
COAST

Depress the brake pedal. When


the desired vehicle speed is
reached, press SET ACCEL. RES

SET
ACCEL

COAST

74
Driver Controls
To disengage speed control
Depress the brake pedal or

Depress the clutch pedal (if


equipped).
Disengaging the speed control will
not erase the previously
programmed set speed.

Pressing OFF will erase the


previously programmed set speed.

ON

OFF

75
Driver Controls
To return to a previously set speed
Press RES. For RES to operate,
the vehicle speed must be faster
than 48 km/h (30 mph). RES

SET
ACCEL

COAST

Indicator light
This light comes on when either the
SET ACCEL or RES controls are
pressed. The vehicle speed must be
at or above 48 km/h (30 mph). It
turns off when the speed control
OFF control is pressed, the brake or
clutch is applied, or the ignition is turned to the OFF position.

OVERDRIVE CONTROL (IF EQUIPPED)

Activating overdrive
(Overdrive) is the normal drive position for the best fuel economy.
The overdrive function allows automatic upshifts and downshifts through
all available gears.

Deactivating overdrive
Press the Transmission Control
Switch (TCS) located on the end of
the gearshift lever. The OVERDRIVE
Transmission Control Indicator Light
(TCIL) (the word OFF) will
illuminate on the end of the gearshift lever. The transmission will operate
in all gears except overdrive.

76
Driver Controls
To return to normal overdrive mode,
press the Transmission Control OVERDRIVE OFF
Switch again. The TCIL (the word
OFF) will no longer be illuminated.
When you shut off and re-start your vehicle, the transmission will
automatically return to normal (Overdrive) mode.
For additional information about the gearshift lever and the transmission
control switch operation refer to the Automatic Transmission
Operation section of the Driving chapter.
CENTER CONSOLE (IF EQUIPPED)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a variety of console features. These
include:
Utility compartment with
cassette/CD holder
Coin holder
Pen holder
Writing surface

Utility compartment
Coin holder
Pen holder
Writing surface
Space for lap-top computer

TRIP COMPUTER (IF EQUIPPED)


The trip computer tells you about the condition of your vehicle through
a constant monitor of vehicle systems. You may select display features on
the trip computer for a display of status.
The appearance of your vehicles trip computer may differ depending on
your vehicles option package, but the functions are the same.

77
Driver Controls
The trip computer only operates with the ignition in the ON position.
Trip computer features follow:

Selectable features

English/metric display
Press this control to change the trip
computer display between metric
and English units.

Mode control
Each press of the MODE control will
display a different feature as follows:
Average fuel economy. The
display will indicate the vehicles
average fuel economy in liters/100
km (or miles/gallon) since the
average fuel economy was last reset.
If you calculate your average fuel
economy by dividing liters of fuel used by 100 kilometers traveled (miles
traveled by gallons used), your figure may be different than displayed for
the following reasons:
your vehicle was not perfectly level during fill-up
differences in the automatic shut-off points on the fuel pumps at
service stations
variations in top-off procedure from one fill-up to another
rounding of the displayed values to the nearest liter (gallon)
To reset the average fuel economy:
1. Press the MODE control repeatedly until average fuel economy is
displayed (this is the only resettable display).

78
Driver Controls
2. Press the E/M and MODE
controls simultaneously. The display
will illuminate the AVG indicator.
While the indicator is lit, release
both controls to reset the average
fuel economy.

Fuel range. This displays the approximate number of kilometers (miles)


left to drive before the fuel tank is empty. The indicated distance to
empty may be inaccurate:
with sustained, drastic changes in fuel economy (such as trailer
towing), but will eventually recover.
if the vehicle is started while parked on an incline.
if less than 30 liters (8 gallons) of fuel is added to the fuel tank.
The fuel range function will flash for five seconds at the following
distances based on fuel remaining and fuel economy calculations:
80 km (50 miles)
40 km (25 miles)
16 km (10 miles)
Outside air temperature
The temperature can be displayed in
Centigrade or Fahrenheit by
pressing the E/M control.
If the outside temperature falls
below 3C (38F), the display will
alternate from ICE to the outside
temperature at a two second rate
for one minute.
Off. In this mode the display is off.
Compass
The compass display is contained in the overhead console. The vehicle
heading is displayed as one of N, NE, E, SE, S, SW, W and NW.
The compass heading is displayed in average fuel economy modes, fuel
range modes and temperature modes.
The compass reading may be affected when you drive near large
buildings, bridges, power lines and powerful broadcast antenna. Magnetic

79
Driver Controls
or metallic objects placed in or on the vehicle may also affect compass
accuracy. Adjustments may need to be made to the zone and calibration
of the compass.

Compass zone adjustment


1. Determine which magnetic zone
you are in for your geographic
location by referring to the zone
map.
2. Locate the trip computer on the
overhead console.
3. Turn ignition to the ON position.

4. Press and hold both trip


computer controls. After
approximately four seconds, the trip
computer will enter zone setting
mode. Zone setting mode is
indicated when the display lights the
ZONE indicator.
5. Release both controls.
Subsequent pressing of either
control will increment the zone.
Press the control repeatedly until the correct zone setting for your
geographic location is displayed on the trip computer.
6. To exit the zone setting mode and save the displayed zone in memory,
release both controls for greater than five seconds.
Compass calibration adjustment
Perform this adjustment in an open area free from steel structures and
high voltage lines.
For optimum calibration, turn off all electrical accessories (heater/air
conditioning, wipers, etc.) and make sure all vehicle doors are shut.
1. Locate the trip computer located in the overhead console.
2. Start the vehicle.

80
Driver Controls
3. Press and hold both trip computer
controls. After approximately eight
seconds, the trip computer will enter
CAL mode. CAL mode is indicated
when the display lights the CAL
indicator.
4. Release both controls. The display
will return to normal, except that the
CAL indicator will remain lit until the compass is sucessfully calibrated.
5. Slowly drive the vehicle in a circle (less than 5 km/h [3 mph]) until
the CAL indicator turns off. It may take up to five circles to complete
calibration.
6. The compass is now calibrated.
TAILGATE LOCK (IF EQUIPPED)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a
tailgate lock designed to prevent
theft of the tailgate.
Insert ignition key and turn to the
right to engage lock.
Turn ignition key to the left to
unlock.

Tailgate removal
Your tailgate is removable to allow
more room for loading.
1. Lower the tailgate.
2. Use a screwdriver to pry the
spring clip (on each connector) past
the head of the support screw.
Disconnect cable.
3. Disconnect the other cable.
4. Lift tailgate to a 45 degree angle.
5. Lift right side off of its hinge.
6. Lift left side off of its hinge.
To install, follow the removal procedures in reverse order.

81
Locks and Security
KEYS
The key operates all locks on your vehicle. In case of loss, replacement
keys are available from your dealer.
You should always carry a second key with you in a safe place in case
you require it in an emergency.

POWER DOOR LOCKS (IF EQUIPPED)


Press control to unlock all doors.

Press control to lock all doors.

Smart locks (if equipped)


This feature prevents you from locking yourself out of the vehicle if your
key is still in the ignition.
When you open the drivers door and you lock the vehicle with the
power door locks, all the doors will lock, then the drivers door will
automatically unlock reminding you that your key is still in the ignition.
The vehicle can still be locked, with the key in the ignition, using the
manual lock button on the door, locking the drivers door with a key, or
using the lock button on the remote entry transmitter (if equipped).

82
Locks and Security
Childproof door locks
When these locks are set, the rear
doors cannot be opened from the
inside. The rear doors can be
opened from the outside when the
doors are unlocked.
The childproof locks are located on
rear edge of each rear door and
must be set separately for each
door. Setting the lock for one door
will not automatically set the lock
for both doors.
Move lock control up to engage the
childproof lock. Move control down
to disengage childproof locks.

REMOTE ENTRY SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)


This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and with RS-210 of
Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device
must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void the users authority to
operate the equipment.
The remote entry system allows you to lock or unlock all vehicle doors
without a key.
The remote entry LOCK and UNLOCK operate with the ignition in the
ON or OFF position and the transmission in P (Park) or N (Neutral).
If there is any potential remote keyless entry problem with your vehicle,
ensure ALL remote entry transmitters are brought to the dealership,
to aid in troubleshooting.

83
Locks and Security
Unlocking the doors
Press this control to unlock the
drivers door. The interior lamps will
illuminate.
Press the control a second time
within three seconds to unlock all
doors.

Locking the doors


Press this control to lock all doors.
If all doors are closed, the parking
lamps will flash once.
Press the control a second time
within three seconds. The doors will
lock again and the parking lamps
will flash once more. If any of the
doors are ajar, the horn will make
two quick chirps, reminding you to
properly close all doors.

Power door unlock disable feature (if equipped)


This feature will help protect your
vehicle from unauthorized entry.
The UNLOCK function on the power
door switch will not operate with
the ignition OFF and twenty
seconds after the doors are closed
and electronically locked by the
remote entry transmitter, key pad,
or power door switch (if pressed while the door was open).
The UNLOCK function will operate again after you unlock the vehicle
using the remote entry transmitter or key pad, turn the ignition to ON,
or open the door from inside of the vehicle.

84
Locks and Security
Power door unlock disable feature activation/deactivation
1. Turn the ignition key to ON.
2. Press the UNLOCK button 3 times.
3. Turn the ignition key to OFF.
4. Press the UNLOCK button 3 times.
5. Turn the ignition key to ON. The horn will chirp.
6. Press the LOCK button 2 times. You should receive 2 horn chirps to
indicate the system has been disabled, or 2 chirps followed by a honk to
indicate the system has been enabled.
Note: Pressing the power door LOCK button two times again will turn
the feature ON if it was previously OFF, or OFF if it was previously ON.
Every two consecutive presses of the LOCK button after successfully
entering the configuration mode will change the enable/disable condition
of the feature.
7. Turn ignition to OFF to exit programming. The horn will chirp once to
confirm the procedure is complete.

Sounding a panic alarm


Press this control to activate the
alarm.
To deactivate the alarm, press the
control again or turn the ignition to
ACC or ON.
Panic alarm will only operate with
the ignition in the OFF position.

Replacing the battery


The remote transmitter is powered by one coin type three-volt lithium
battery CR2032 or equivalent. Typical operating range will allow you to
be up to 10 meters (33 feet) away from your vehicle. A decrease in
operating range can be caused by the following factors:
Weather conditions
Nearby radio towers
Structures around the vehicle
Other vehicles parked next to the vehicle

85
Locks and Security
To replace the battery:
1. Twist a thin coin between the two
halves of the transmitter near the
key ring. DO NOT TAKE THE
FRONT PART OF THE
TRANSMITTER APART.
2. Place the positive (+) side of new
battery in the same orientation.
Refer to the diagram inside the
transmitter unit.
3. Snap the two halves back
together.
Replacement of the battery will not cause the remote transmitter to
become deprogrammed from your vehicle. The remote transmitter should
operate normally after battery replacement.
Replacing lost transmitters
If a remote transmitter has been lost
and you would like to remove it
from the vehicles memory, or you
would like to purchase additional
remote transmitters and have them
programmed to your vehicle:
Take all your vehicles
transmitters to your dealer for
programming, or
Perform the programming
procedure yourself.
Programming remote transmitters
It is necessary to have all (maximum of four original and/or new) of
your remote transmitters available prior to beginning this procedure.

86
Locks and Security
To program the transmitters yourself:
Ensure the vehicle is unlocked.
Place the key in the ignition and 4
turn from 2 (LOCK) to 3 (OFF) 3
and cycle between 3 (OFF) and
5
4(ON) eight times in rapid
succession (within 10 seconds) 2
with the eighth turn ending in the
4 (ON) position. The doors will
lock to confirm that programming 1
mode has been entered.
Within 20 seconds, program a remote transmitter by pressing any
button on a transmitter. The doors will lock/unlock to confirm that the
remote transmitter has been programmed. (If more than 20 seconds
pass before pressing a remote transmitter button, the programming
mode will exit and the procedure will have to be repeated.)
Repeat the previous step to program additional remote transmitters.
The doors will lock/unlock to confirm that each remote transmitter has
been programmed.
When you have completed programming the remote transmitters, turn
the ignition to 3 (OFF) or wait 20 seconds. Again the doors will
lock/unlock to confirm programming has been completed.
Illuminated entry
The interior lamps illuminate when the remote entry system is used to
unlock the door(s) or sound the personal alarm.
The illuminated entry system will turn off the interior lights if the
ignition switch is turned to the ON position, or if the remote transmitter
lock control is pressed, or after 25 seconds of illumination. The dome
lamp control (if equipped) must not be set to the OFF position for the
illuminated entry system to operate.
The inside lights will not turn off if:
they have been turned on with the dimmer control, or
any door is open.
The battery saver will shut off the interior lamps 30 minutes after the
ignition has been turned to the OFF position, 10 minutes after if the
dome lamp is off, and 30 minutes after if the dome lamp switch is left
on.

87
Locks and Security
Autolock (if equipped)
This feature automatically locks all vehicle doors when the following
conditions are met:
all doors are closed, and
the brake is pressed before reaching 8 km/h (5 mph), and
the ignition is in the RUN position and the vehicle is traveling more
than 8 km/h (5 mph).
Relock
The autolock feature repeats when the following conditions are met:
any door is opened then closed while the ignition is in the RUN
position, and
the brake is pressed before reaching 8 km/h (5 mph), and
the vehicle is travleing more than 8 km/h (5 mph).
Deactivating/activating the autolock feature
Before following the procedure, make sure that the ignition is OFF and
all vehicle doors are closed.
You must complete steps 1-7 within 30 seconds or the procedure will
have to be repeated. If the procedure needs to be repeated, you must
wait 30 seconds.
1. Turn the ignition key to ON.
2. Press the power door unlock control three times.
3. Turn the ignition key from ON to OFF.
4. Press the power door unlock control three times.
5. Turn the ignition back to ON. The horn will chirp.
6. Press the unlock control, then press the lock control. The horn will
chirp once if autolock was deactivated or twice (one short and one long
chirp) if autolock was activated.
7. Turn the ignition to OFF. The horn will chirp once to confirm the
procedure is complete.

88
Seating and Safety Restraints
SEATING

Full bench seat (if equipped)


Lift the track release bar to move
the seat forward or backward.
Ensure that the seat is relatched
into place.
Pull up on the release lever
located at the bottom of the
seatback to quickly fold the
seatback forward.

40/20/40 split bench seat (if equipped)


Lift the track release bar to move
the seat forward or backward.
Ensure the seat is relatched into
place.
Pull the seatback handle up to
recline the seat.
Push down the release lever
located at the bottom of the
seatback to quickly fold the
seatback forward.

89
Seating and Safety Restraints
Captains chair (if equipped)
Lift the track release bar to move
the seat forward or rearward.
Make sure that the seat is
relatched into place.
Pull the release lever handle
located on the side of the seat up
to move the seat back forward or
backward.
Push down the release lever (if
equipped) located at the bottom
of the seatback to quickly fold the
seatback forward.

Manual seat memory feature


The manual adjust seat and seatback may lose their memory positions
and not latch in the desired place. To reset the memory position, move
the seat to the most forward position then push the seatback rearward
until the seatback locks. This should ensure that the seatback is
realigned to the desired rest position.
Adjusting the front power seat (if equipped)
Never adjust the drivers seat or seatback when the vehicle is
moving.

Do not pile cargo higher than the seatbacks to avoid injuring


people in a collision or sudden stop.

Always drive and ride with your seatback upright and the lap
belt snug and low across the hips.

Reclining the seatback can cause an occupant to slide under the


seats safety belt, resulting in severe personal injuries in the
event of a collision.

90
Seating and Safety Restraints
The control is located on the outboard side of the seat cushion.
Press to raise or lower the front
portion of the seat cushion.

Press to raise or lower the rear


portion of the seat cushion.

Press the control to move the seat


forward, backward, up or down.

Using the manual lumbar support


Turn the lumbar support control
toward the front of vehicle to move
the lumbar support forward for
more direct support.
Turn the lumbar support control
toward the rear of vehicle to move
the lumbar support back for less
direct support.

91
Seating and Safety Restraints
Heated seats (if equipped)
To operate the heated seats:
Push control to activate.
Push again to deactivate.
The indicator light on the control
will illuminate when activated.

FOLDING UP THE REAR SEATS


(IF EQUIPPED SUPERCAB ONLY)
The rear seatback has a split 60/40 seat. Each seat cushion can be
flipped up into the seatback position.
1. Pull control to release seat
cushion.
2. Rotate seat cushion up until it
locks into vertical storage position.

RETURNING THE SEAT TO SEATING POSITION


Always be sure that the seat is in a latched position, whether the
seat is occupied or empty. If not latched, the seat may cause
injury during a sudden stop.

1. Pull control on the side of the seat to release seat cushion from
storage position.
2. Push seat cushion down until it locks into horizontal position.

92
Seating and Safety Restraints
SAFETY RESTRAINTS

Safety restraints precautions


Always drive and ride with your seatback upright and the lap
belt snug and low across the hips.

To reduce the risk of injury, make sure children sit where they
can be properly restrained.

Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap while the
vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the child from
injury in a collision.

All occupants of the vehicle, including the driver, should always


properly wear their safety belts, even when an air bag (SRS) is
provided.

It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or


outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas
are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not allow people to
ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and
safety belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a
safety belt properly.

In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely


to die than a person wearing a safety belt.

Each seating position in your vehicle has a specific safety belt


assembly which is made up of one buckle and one tongue that
are designed to be used as a pair. 1) Use the shoulder belt on the
outside shoulder only. Never wear the shoulder belt under the arm.
2) Never swing the safety belt around your neck over the inside
shoulder. 3) Never use a single belt for more than one person.

93
Seating and Safety Restraints

Always transport children 12 years old and under in the back


seat and always properly use appropriate child restraints.

Combination lap and shoulder belts


1. Insert the belt tongue into the
proper buckle (the buckle closest to
the direction the tongue is coming
from) until you hear a snap and feel
it latch. Make sure the tongue is
securely fastened in the buckle.

2. To unfasten, push the release


button and remove the tongue from
the buckle.

The front and rear outboard safety restraints in the vehicle are
combination lap and shoulder belts. The front passenger and rear seat
outboard safety belts have two types of locking modes described below:
Vehicle sensitive mode
The vehicle sensitive mode is the normal retractor mode, allowing free
shoulder belt length adjustment to your movements and locking in
response to vehicle movement. For example, if the driver brakes
suddenly or turns a corner sharply, or the vehicle receives an impact of
approximately 8 km/h (5 mph) or more, the combination safety belts will
lock to help reduce forward movement of the driver and passengers.
On SuperCab and CrewCab models, the front seat belt system can also
be made to lock manually by quickly pulling on the shoulder belt.
Rear seat belts (if equipped) cannot be made to lock up by pulling
quickly on the belt.

94
Seating and Safety Restraints
Automatic locking mode
In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-locked. The belt will
still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt.
The automatic locking mode is not available on the driver safety belt.
When to use the automatic locking mode
Any time a child safety seat is installed in a passenger front or
outboard rear seating position (if equipped). Children 12 years old and
under should be properly restrained in the rear seat whenever
possible. Refer to Safety Restraints for Children or Safety Seats for
Children later in this chapter.
How to use the automatic locking mode
Buckle the combination lap and
shoulder belt.

Grasp the shoulder portion and


pull downward until the entire
belt is extracted.

Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will hear a clicking
sound. This indicates the safety belt is now in the automatic locking
mode.

95
Seating and Safety Restraints
How to disengage the automatic locking mode
Ford Motor Company recommends that all safety belt assemblies
and attaching hardware should be inspected by a qualified
technician after any collision. Safety belt assemblies not in use during a
collision should also be inspected and replaced if either damage or
improper operation is noted.

Disconnect the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it to retract


completely to disengage the automatic locking mode and activate the
vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode.
After any vehicle collision, the front passenger outboard seat belt
system must be checked by a qualified technician to verify that
the automatic locking retractor feature for child seats is still
functioning properly. In addition, all seat belts should be checked for
proper function.

BELT AND RETRACTOR ASSEMBLY MUST BE REPLACED if


the seat belt assembly automatic locking retractor feature or
any other seat belt function is not operating properly when checked
according to the procedures in Workshop Manual.

Failure to replace the Belt and Retractor assembly could


increase the risk of injury in collisions.

Energy Management Feature


This vehicle has a seat belt system with an energy management
feature at the front outboard seating position to help further reduce
the risk of injury in the event of a head-on collision.
The front outboard seat belt system has a retractor assembly that is
designed to pay out webbing in a controlled manner. This feature is
designed to help reduce the belt force acting on the occupants chest.

96
Seating and Safety Restraints
Safety belt replacement label
The short plastic boot on the front
safety belt at the passenger
outboard anchor location covers a
Replace Belt label on the safety
belt.

In the event of a collision, the


colored label (REPLACE BELT)
may become visible. If this occurs,
the safety belt must be replaced.

Whenever the yellow


portion of the label is
visible, the safety belt must be
replaced.

97
Seating and Safety Restraints

Failure to follow these instructions will affect the performance of


the safety belts and increase the risk of personal injury.

Safety belt pretensioner (if equipped)


Your vehicle is equipped with safety belt pretensioners at the driver and
front outboard passenger seating positions.
The Seat Integrated Restraints (SIR) seat is equipped with a buckle
pretensioner. Do NOT place objects between the seats, this could
interfere with the functioning of the pretensioner. For the SuperCab and
CrewCab base bench seats and all Regular Cab seating positions, the
seatbelts are equipped with a retractor pretensioner.
The safety belt pretensioners are designed to activate only during certain
frontal or near-frontal collisions with sufficient longitudinal deceleration.
A safety belt pretensioner is a device which tightens the webbing of the
lap and shoulder belts in such a way that they fit more snugly against
the body.
The driver and front outboard passenger safety belt system (including
retractors, buckles and height adjusters) must be replaced if the vehicle
is involved in a collision that results in the activation of the safety belt
pretensioners. Refer to the Safety belt maintenance section in this
chapter.
Failure to replace the safety belt assembly under the above
conditions could result in severe personal injuries in the event of
a collision.

Front safety belt height adjustment


If your vehicle has seat integrated restraints you will not have safety belt
height adjustments.
Your vehicle may have safety belt height adjustments for the driver and
front passenger. Adjust the height of the shoulder belt so the belt rests
across the middle of your shoulder.

98
Seating and Safety Restraints
Regular Cab and 4door CrewCab

4door Super Cab (if equipped)

99
Seating and Safety Restraints
To lower the shoulder belt height, push the button and slide the height
adjuster down. To raise the height of the shoulder belt, slide the height
adjuster up. Pull down on the height adjuster to make sure it is locked in
place.
Position the safety belt height adjusters so that the belt rests
across the middle of your shoulder. Failure to adjust the safety
belt properly could reduce the effectiveness of the seat belt and
increase the risk of injury in a collision.

Lap belts
Adjusting the center lap belt
The lap belt does not adjust automatically.
The lap belt should fit snugly and as low as possible around the
hips, not across the waist.

Insert the tongue into the correct


buckle (the buckle closest to the
direction the tongue is coming
from). To lengthen the belt, turn the
tongue at a right angle to the belt
and pull across your lap until it
reaches the buckle. To tighten the
belt, pull the loose end of the belt
through the tongue until it fits
snugly across the hips.

Shorten and fasten the belt when


not in use.

100
Seating and Safety Restraints
Safety belt warning light and indicator chime
The seat belt warning light illuminates in the instrument cluster and a
chime sounds to remind the occupants to fasten their safety belts.
Conditions of operation
If... Then...
The drivers safety belt is not The safety belt warning light
buckled before the ignition switch illuminates 1-2 minutes and the
is turned to the ON position... warning chime sounds 4-8
seconds.
The drivers safety belt is buckled The safety belt warning light and
while the indicator light is warning chime turn off.
illuminated and the warning chime
is sounding...
The drivers safety belt is buckled The safety belt warning light and
before the ignition switch is turned indicator chime remain off.
to the ON position...

BeltMinder
The BeltMinder feature is a supplemental warning to the safety belt
warning function. This feature provides additional reminders to the
driver that the drivers safety belt is unbuckled by intermittently
sounding a chime and illuminating the safety belt warning lamp in the
instrument cluster.
If... Then...
The drivers safety belt is not The BeltMinder feature is
buckled before the vehicle has activated - the safety belt warning
reached at least 5 km/h (3 mph) light illuminates and the warning
and 1-2 minutes have elapsed chime sounds for 6 seconds every
since the ignition switch has been 30 seconds, repeating for
turned to ON... approximately 5 minutes or until
safety belt is buckled.
The drivers safety belt is buckled The BeltMinder feature will not
while the safety belt indicator light activate.
is illuminated and the safety belt
warning chime is sounding...

101
Seating and Safety Restraints

If... Then...
The drivers safety belt is buckled The BeltMinder feature will not
before the ignition switch is turned activate.
to the ON position...
The purpose of the BeltMinder is to remind occasional wearers to wear
safety belts all of the time.
The following are reasons most often given for not wearing safety belts:
(All statistics based on U.S. data)
Reasons given... Consider...
Crashes are rare 36 700 crashes occur every day. The more we
events drive, the more we are exposed to rare events,
even for good drivers. 1 in 4 of us will be
seriously injured in a crash during our
lifetime.
Im not going far 3 of 4 fatal crashes occur within 25 miles of home.
Belts are We design our safety belts to enhance comfort. If
uncomfortable you are uncomfortable - try different positions for
the safety belt upper anchorage and seatback
which should be as upright as possible; this can
improve comfort.
I was in a hurry Prime time for an accident. BeltMinder reminds
us to take a few seconds to buckle up.
Seat belts dont Safety belts, when used properly, reduce risk of
work death to front seat occupants by 45% in cars,
and by 60% in light trucks.
Traffic is light Nearly 1 of 2 deaths occur in single-vehicle
crashes, many when no other vehicles are around.
Belts wrinkle my Possibly, but a serious crash can do much more
clothes than wrinkle your clothes, particularly if you are
unbelted.
The people Im Set the example, teen deaths occur 4 times more
with dont wear often in vehicles with TWO or MORE people.
belts Children and younger brothers/sisters imitate
behavior they see.

102
Seating and Safety Restraints

Reasons given... Consider...


I have an air bag Air bags offer greater protection when used with
safety belts. Frontal airbags are not designed to
inflate in rear and side crashes or rollovers.
Id rather be Not a good idea. People who are ejected are 40
thrown clear times more likely to DIE. Safety belts help
prevent ejection, WE CANT PICK OUR CRASH.
Do not sit on top of a buckled safety belt to avoid the Belt
Minder chime. Sitting on the safety belt will increase the risk of
injury in an accident. To disable (one-time) or deactivate the Belt
Minder feature please follow the directions stated below.

One time disable


Any time the safety belt is buckled and then unbuckled during an
ignition ON cycle, BeltMinder will be disabled for that ignition cycle only.
Deactivating/activating the BeltMinder feature
Read steps 1 - 9 thoroughly before proceeding with the
deactivation/activation programming procedure.
The BeltMinder feature can be deactivated/activated by performing the
following procedure:
Before following the procedure, make sure that:
The parking brake is set.
The gearshift is in P (Park) (automatic transmission) or the neutral
position (manual transmission).
The ignition switch is in the OFF position.
All vehicle doors are closed.
The drivers safety belt is unbuckled.
The parklamps/headlamps are in OFF position (If vehicle is equipped
with Autolamps, this will not affect the procedure).
To reduce the risk of injury, do not deactivate/activate the Belt
Minder feature while driving the vehicle.

103
Seating and Safety Restraints
1. Turn the ignition switch to the RUN (or ON) position. (DO NOT
START THE ENGINE.)
2. Wait until the safety belt warning light turns off. (Approximately 12
minutes.)
Steps 35 must be completed within 60 seconds or the procedure will
have to be repeated.
3. Buckle then unbuckle the safety belt three times, ending with the
safety belt unbuckled. This can be done before or during BeltMinder
warning activation.
4. Turn on the parklamps/headlamps, turn off the parklamps/headlamps.
5. Buckle then unbuckle the safety belt three times, ending with the
safety belt unbuckled.
After step 5 the safety belt warning light will be turned on for three
seconds.
6. Within seven seconds of the safety belt warning light turning off,
buckle then unbuckle the safety belt.
This will disable BeltMinder if it is currently enabled, or enable
BeltMinder if it is currently disabled.
7. Confirmation of disabling BeltMinder is provided by the safety belt
warning light flashing four times per second for three seconds.
8. Confirmation of enabling BeltMinder is provided by:
The safety belt warning light flashing four times per second for three
seconds.
Followed by three seconds with the safety belt warning light off.
Once again, the safety belt warning light will flash four times per
second for three seconds.
9. After receiving confirmation, the deactivation/activation procedure is
complete.
Safety belt extension assembly
If the safety belt is too short when fully extended, there is a 20 cm (8
inch) safety belt extension assembly that can be added (part number
611C22). This assembly can be obtained from your dealer at no cost.
Use only extensions manufactured by the same supplier as the safety
belt. Manufacturer identification is located at the end of the webbing on
the label. Also, use the safety belt extension only if the safety belt is too
short for you when fully extended.

104
Seating and Safety Restraints
Do not use extensions to change the fit of the shoulder belt across the
torso.

Safety belt maintenance


Inspect the safety belt systems periodically to make sure they work
properly and are not damaged. Inspect the safety belts to make sure
there are no nicks, tears or cuts. Replace if necessary. All safety belt
assemblies, including retractors, buckles, front seat belt buckle
assemblies, buckle support assemblies (slide bar-if equipped), shoulder
belt height adjusters (if equipped), shoulder belt guide on seatback (if
equipped), child safety seat tether bracket assemblies (if equipped),
LATCH child seat tether anchors and lower anchors (if equipped), and
attaching hardware, should be inspected after a collision. Ford Motor
Company recommends that all safety belt assemblies used in vehicles
involved in a collision be replaced. However, if the collision was minor
and a qualified technician finds that the belts do not show damage and
continue to operate properly, they do not need to be replaced. Safety
belt assemblies not in use during a collision should also be inspected and
replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted.
Failure to inspect and if necessary replace the safety belt
assembly under the above conditions could result in severe
personal injuries in the event of a collision.

Refer to Cleaning and maintaining the safety belts in the Cleaning


chapter.

105
Seating and Safety Restraints
AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)

50 60
40 70 2
F 30 80
100 3 VOL - PUSH ON
60
H 120 80 AM FM1 ST

20 40 1 FM BASS TREB
BAL FADE AUTO
SET
140 DIESEL FUEL ONLY
90
H
20
4
10 160
18 MPH km/h SEEK
0 100 RPM x 1000
TUNE
SCAN EJ
DOLBY B NR

TAPE CD
DISCS

REW FF SIDE 1-2 COMP SHUFFLE


1 2 3 4 5 6

P
OFF
O
A/C
MAX
A/C
RES
ON
SET
ACCEL

OFF
COAST

Your vehicle is equipped with a crash sensing and diagnostic module


which records information about the air bag and sensor systems. In the
event of a collision this module may save information related to the
collision including information about the air bag system and impact
severity. This information will assist Ford Motor Company in servicing
the vehicle and in helping to better understand real world collisions and
further improve the safety of future vehicles.

Important supplemental restraint system (SRS) precautions


The supplemental restraint system
is designed to work with the safety
belt to help protect the driver and
right front passenger from certain
upper body injuries.
Air bags DO NOT inflate slowly or
gently and the risk of injury from a
deploying air bag is greatest close to
the trim covering the air bag
module.

All occupants of the vehicle, including the driver, should always


properly wear their safety belts, even when an air bag (SRS) is
provided.

106
Seating and Safety Restraints

Always transport children 12 years old and under in the back


seat and always properly use appropriate child restraints.

National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA)


recommends a minimum distance of at least 25 cm (10 inches)
between an occupants chest and the driver air bag module.

Never place your arm over the air bag module as a deploying air
bag can result in serious arm fractures or other injuries.

Steps you can take to properly position yourself away from the air bag:
Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the
pedals comfortably.
Recline the seat slightly (one or two degrees) from the upright
position.
Do not put anything on or over the air bag module. Placing
objects on or over the air bag inflation area may cause those
objects to be propelled by the air bag into your face and torso causing
serious injury.

Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the air bag


supplemental restraint systems or its fuses. See your Ford or
Lincoln Mercury dealer.

The front passenger air bag is not designed to offer protection to


an occupant in the center front seating position.

Modifications to the front end of the vehicle, including frame,


bumper, front end body structure and tow hooks may affect the
performance of the air bag sensors increasing the risk of injury. Do not
modify the front end of the vehicle.

Additional equipment such as snowplow equipment may effect


the performance of the air bag sensors increasing the risk of
injury. Please refer to the Body Builders Layout Book for instructions
about the appropriate installation of additional equipment.

107
Seating and Safety Restraints

Removing the blocker beam without installing snow plow


attachment hardware may effect air bag deployment in a crash.
Do not operate the truck unless either the blocker beam or snow plow
attachment hardware is installed on the vehicle.

Children and air bags


For additional important safety information, read all information on
safety restraints in this guide.
Children must always be properly restrained. Failure to follow these
instructions may increase the risk of injury in a collision.
An infant in a rear-facing seat faces a high risk of serious or fatal
injuries from a deploying passenger air bag. Rear facing infant
seats should NEVER be placed in the front seats, unless the passenger
air bag is turned off. See Passenger air bag ON/OFF switch.

How does the air bag supplemental restraint system work?


The air bag SRS is designed to
activate when the vehicle sustains
sufficient longitudinal deceleration.
The fact that the air bags did not
inflate in a collision does not mean
that something is wrong with the
system. Rather, it means the forces
were not of the type sufficient to
cause activation. Air bags are
designed to inflate in frontal and
near-frontal collisions, not rollover,
side-impact, or rear-impacts.

108
Seating and Safety Restraints
The air bags inflate and deflate
rapidly upon activation. After air bag
deployment, it is normal to notice a
smoke-like, powdery residue or
smell the burnt propellant. This may
consist of cornstarch, talcum
powder (to lubricate the bag) or
sodium compounds (e.g., baking
soda) that result from the
combustion process that inflates the
air bag. Small amounts of sodium
hydroxide may be present which
may irritate the skin and eyes, but
none of the residue is toxic.
While the system is designed to help
reduce serious injuries, it may also
cause minor abrasions, swelling or temporary hearing loss. Because air
bags must inflate rapidly and with considerable force, there is the risk of
death or serious injuries such as fractures, facial and eye injuries or
internal injuries, particularly to occupants who are not properly
restrained or are otherwise out of position at the time of air bag
deployment. Thus, it is extremely important that occupants be properly
restrained as far away from the air bag module as possible while
maintaining vehicle control.
Several air bag system components get hot after inflation. Do not
touch them after inflation.

If the air bag has deployed, the air bag will not function
again and must be replaced immediately. If the air bag is not
replaced, the unrepaired area will increase the risk of injury in a
collision.

The SRS consists of:


driver and passenger (if equipped) air bag modules (which include the
inflators and air bags),
one or more impact and safing sensors,
a readiness light and tone
and the electrical wiring which connects the components.
The diagnostic module monitors its own internal circuits and the
supplemental air bag electrical system warning (including the impact

109
Seating and Safety Restraints
sensors), the system wiring, the air bag system readiness light, the air
bag back up power and the air bag ignitors.
Determining if the system is operational
The SRS uses a readiness light in the instrument cluster or a tone to
indicate the condition of the system. Refer to Air bag readiness section
in the Instrument cluster chapter. Routine maintenance of the air bag is
not required.
A difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the following:
The readiness light will either
flash or stay lit.
The readiness light will not
illuminate immediately after
ignition is turned on.
A series of five beeps will be heard. The tone pattern will repeat
periodically until the problem and/or light are repaired.
If any of these things happen, even intermittently, have the SRS serviced
at your dealership or by a qualified technician immediately. Unless
serviced, the system may not function properly in the event of a
collision.
Disposal of air bags and air bag equipped vehicles
(including pretensioners)
For disposal of air bags or air bag equipped vehicles, see your local
dealership or qualified technician. Air bags MUST BE disposed of by
qualified personnel.
Passenger air bag ON/OFF switch (if equipped)

An air bag ON/OFF switch


has been installed in this PASSENGER AIR BAG
vehicle. Before driving, always OFF
look at the face of the switch to ON
be sure the switch is in the proper OFF
position in accordance with these
instructions and warnings. Failure
to put the switch in a proper
position can increase the risk of
serious injury or death in a
collision.

110
Seating and Safety Restraints
Turning the passenger air bag off
1. Insert the ignition key, turn the
switch to OFF position and hold in PASSENGER AIR BAG
OFF position while removing the
key. ON
OFF

2. When the ignition is turned to the OFF


ON position the OFF light
illuminates briefly, momentarily
shuts off and then turns back on.
This indicates that the passenger air
bag is deactivated.
If the light fails to illuminate when the passenger air bag switch
is in the OFF position and the ignition switch is in ON, have the
passenger air bag switch serviced at your Ford or Lincoln-Mercury
dealer immediately.

In order to avoid inadvertent activation of the switch, always


remove the ignition key from the passenger air bag ON/OFF
switch.

Turning the passenger air bag back on


The passenger air bag remains OFF until you turn it back ON.
1. Insert the ignition key and turn
the switch to ON. PASSENGER AIR BAG
2. The OFF light will briefly
OFF
illuminate when the ignition is ON
turned to On. This indicates that the OFF
passenger air bag is operational.

If the OFF light is illuminated when the passenger air bag switch
is in the ON position and the ignition switch is in ON, have the
passenger air bag switch serviced at your Ford or Lincoln-Mercury
dealer immediately.

111
Seating and Safety Restraints
The passenger side air bag should always be ON (the air bag OFF light
should not be illuminated) unless the passenger is a person who meets
the requirements stated either in Category 1, 2 or 3 of the
NHTSA/Transport Canada deactivation criteria which follows.
The safety belts for the driver and right front passenger seating
positions have been specifically designed to function together
with the air bags in certain types of crashes. When you turn OFF your
air bag, you not only lose the protection of the air bag, you also may
reduce the effectiveness of your safety belt system, which was
designed to work with the air bag. If you are not a person who meets
the requirements stated in the NHTSA/Transport Canada deactivation
criteria turning OFF the air bag can increase the risk of serious injury
or death in a collision.

Always transport children who are 12 and younger in the rear


seat. Always use safety belts and child restraints properly. If a
child in a rear facing infant seat must be transported in front, the
passenger air bag must be turned OFF. This is because the back of the
infant seat is too close to the inflating air bag and the risk of a fatal
injury to the infant when the air bag inflates is substantial.

The vast majority of drivers and passengers are much safer with an air
bag than without. To do their job and reduce the risk of life threatening
injuries, air bags must open with great force, and this force can pose a
potentially deadly risk in some situations, particularly when a front seat
occupant is not properly buckled up. The most effective way to reduce
the risk of unnecessary air bag injuries without reducing the overall
safety of the vehicle is to make sure all occupants are properly
restrained in the vehicle, especially in the front seat. This provides the
protection of safety belts and permits the air bags to provide the
additional protection they were designed to provide. If you choose to
deactivate your air bag, you are losing the very significant risk reducing
benefits of the air bag and you are also reducing the effectiveness of the
safety belts, because safety belts in modern vehicles are designed to
work as a safety system with the air bags.
Read all air bag Warning labels in the vehicle as well as the other
important air bag instructions and Warnings in this Owners Guide.

112
Seating and Safety Restraints
NHTSA deactivation criteria (excluding Canada)
1. Infant. An infant (less than 1 year old) must ride in the front seat
because:
the vehicle has no rear seat;
the vehicle has a rear seat too small to accommodate a rear-facing
infant seat; or
the infant has a medical condition which, according to the infants
physician, makes it necessary for the infant to ride in the front so that
the driver can constantly monitor the childs condition.
2. Child age 1 to 12. A child age 1 to 12 must ride in the front seat
because:
the vehicle has no rear seat;
although children ages 1 to 12 ride in the rear seat(s) whenever
possible, children ages 1 to 12 sometimes must ride in the front
because no space is available in the rear seat(s) of the vehicle; or
the child has a medical condition which, according to the childs
physician, makes it necessary for the child to ride in the front seat so
that the driver can constantly monitor the childs condition.
3. Medical condition. A passenger has a medical condition which,
according to his or her physician:
causes the passenger air bag to pose a special risk for the passenger;
and
makes the potential harm from the passenger air bag in a crash
greater than the potential harm from turning OFF the air bag and
allowing the passenger, even if belted, to hit the dashboard or
windshield in a crash.
This vehicle has special energy management safety belts for the
driver and/or right front passenger. These particular belts are
specifically designed to work with air bags to help reduce the risk of
injury in a collision. The energy management safety belt is designed to
give or release additional belt webbing in some accidents to reduce
concentration of force on an occupants chest and reduce the risk of
certain bone fractures and injuries to underlying organs. In a crash, if
the air bag is turned OFF, this energy management safety belt might
permit the person wearing the belt to move forward enough to incur a
serious or fatal injury. The more severe the crash, and the heavier the
occupant, the greater the risk is. Be sure the air bag is turned ON for
any person who does not qualify under the NHTSA deactivation
criteria.

113
Seating and Safety Restraints
Transport Canada deactivation criteria (Canada Only)
1. Infant: An infant (less than 1 year old) must ride in the front seat
because:
my vehicle has no rear seat;
the rear seat in my vehicle cannot accommodate a rear-facing infant
seat; or
the infant has a medical condition which, according to the infants
physician, makes it necessary for the infant to ride in the front seat so
that the driver can monitor the infants condition.
2. Child age 12 or under: A child age 12 or under must ride in the
front seat because:
my vehicle has no rear seat;
although children age 12 and under ride in the rear seat whenever
possible, children age 12 and under have no option but to sometimes
ride in the front seat because rear seat space is insufficient; or
the child has a medical condition that, according to the childs
physician, makes it necessary for the child to ride in the front seat so
that the driver can monitor the childs condition.
3. Medical condition: A passenger has a medical condition that,
according to his or her physician:
poses a special risk for the passenger if the air bag deploys; and
makes the potential harm from the passenger air bag deployment
greater than the potential harm from turning OFF the air bag and
experiencing a crash without the protection offered by the air bag
This vehicle has special energy management safety belts for the
driver and/or right front passenger. These particular belts are
specifically designed to work with air bags to help reduce the risk of
injury in a collision. The energy management safety belt is designed to
give or release additional belt webbing in some accidents to reduce
concentration of force on an occupants chest and reduce the risk of
certain bone fractures and injuries to underlying organs. In a crash, if
the air bag is turned OFF, this energy management safety belt might
permit the person wearing the belt to move forward enough to incur a
serious or fatal injury. The more severe the crash, and the heavier the
occupant, the greater the risk is. Be sure the air bag is turned ON for
any person who does not qualify under the Transport Canada
deactivation criteria.

114
Seating and Safety Restraints
SAFETY RESTRAINTS FOR CHILDREN
See the following sections for directions on how to properly use safety
restraints for children. Also see Air bag supplemental restraint system
(SRS) in this chapter for special instructions about using air bags.
Important child restraint precautions
You are required by law to use safety restraints for children in the U.S.
and Canada. If small children ride in your vehicle (generally children who
are four years old or younger and who weigh 18 kg [40 lbs] or less), you
must put them in safety seats made especially for children. Check your
local and state or provincial laws for specific requirements regarding the
safety of children in your vehicle.
Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap while the
vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the child from
injury in a collision.

Always follow the instructions and warnings that come with any infant or
child restraint you might use.
When possible, always place children under age 12 in the rear seat of
your vehicle. Accident statistics suggest that children are safer when
properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating
positions.
Children and safety belts
If the child is the proper size, restrain the child in a safety seat.
Children who are too large for child safety seats (as specified by your
child safety seat manufacturer) should always wear safety belts.
Follow all the important safety restraint and air bag precautions that
apply to adult passengers in your vehicle.
If the shoulder belt portion of a combination lap and shoulder belt can
be positioned so it does not cross or rest in front of the childs face or
neck, the child should wear the lap and shoulder belt. Moving the child
closer to the center of the vehicle may help provide a good shoulder belt
fit.
Do not leave children, unreliable adults, or pets unattended in
your vehicle.

115
Seating and Safety Restraints
Child booster seats
Children outgrow a typical convertible or toddler seat when they weigh
40 pounds and are around 4 years of age. Although the lap/shoulder belt
will provide some protection, these children are still too small for
lap/shoulder belts to fit properly, which could increase the risk of serious
injury.
To improve the fit of both the lap and shoulder belt on children who
have outgrown child safety seats, Ford Motor Company recommends use
of a belt-positioning booster.
Booster seats position a child so that safety belts fit better. They lift the
child up so that the lap belt rests low across the hips and the knees
bend comfortably. Booster seats also make the shoulder belt fit better
and more comfortably for growing children.
When children should use booster seats
Children need to use booster seats from the time they outgrow the
toddler seat until they are big enough for the vehicle seat and
lap/shoulder belt to fit properly. Generally this is when they weigh about
80 lbs (about 8 to 12 years old).
Booster seats should be used until you can answer YES to ALL of these
questions:
Can the child sit all the way back
against the vehicle seat back with
knees bent comfortably at the
edge of the seat without
slouching?

Does the lap belt rest low across the hips?


Is the shoulder belt centered on the shoulder and chest?
Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?

116
Seating and Safety Restraints
Types of booster seats
There are two types of belt-positioning booster seats:
Those that are backless.
If your backless booster seat has a
removable shield, remove the
shield and use the lap/shoulder
belt. If a seating position has a
low seat back and no head
restraint, a backless booster seat
may place your childs head (top
of ear level) above the top of the
seat. In this case, move the
backless booster to another
seating position with a higher seat back and lap/shoulder belts.
Those with a high back.
If, with a backless booster seat,
you cannot find a seating position
that adequately supports your
childs head, a high back booster
seat would be a better choice.

Both can be used in any vehicle in a seating position equipped with


lap/shoulder belts if your child is over 40 lbs.
The shoulder belt should cross the chest, resting snugly on the center of
the shoulder. The lap belt should rest low and snug across the hips,
never up high across the stomach.
If the booster seat slides on the vehicle seat, placing a rubberized mesh
sold as shelf or carpet liner under the booster seat may improve this
condition.
The importance of shoulder belts
Using a booster without a shoulder belt increases the risk of a childs
head hitting a hard surface in a collision. For this reason, you should
never use a booster seat with a lap belt only. It is best to use a booster
seat with lap/shoulder belts in the back seat- the safest place for children
to ride.

117
Seating and Safety Restraints

Follow all instructions provided by the manufacturer of the


booster seat.

Never put the shoulder belt under a childs arm or behind the
back because it eliminates the protection for the upper part of
the body and may increase the risk of injury or death in a collision.

Never use pillows, books, or towels to boost a child. They can


slide around and increase the likelihood of injury or death in a
collision.

SAFETY SEATS FOR CHILDREN

Child and infant or child safety seats


Use a safety seat that is recommended for the size and weight of the
child. Carefully follow all of the manufacturers instructions with the
safety seat you put in your vehicle. If you do not install and use the
safety seat properly, the child may be injured in a sudden stop or
collision.

118
Seating and Safety Restraints
When installing a child safety seat:
Review and follow the information
presented in the Air bag
supplemental restraint system
(SRS) section in this chapter.
Use the correct safety belt buckle
for that seating position (the
buckle closest to the direction the
tongue is coming from).
Insert the belt tongue into the
proper buckle until you hear a
snap and feel it latch. Make sure
the tongue is securely fastened in
the buckle.
Keep the buckle release button
pointing up and away from the
safety seat, with the tongue
between the child seat and the
release button, to prevent accidental unbuckling.
Place seat back in upright position.
Put the safety belt in the automatic locking mode. Refer to Automatic
locking mode (passenger side front and outboard rear seating
positions) (if equipped) section in this chapter.
Ford recommends the use of a child safety seat having a top tether
strap. Install the child safety seat in a seating position which is capable
of providing a tether anchorage. For more information on top tether
straps, refer to Attaching child safety seats with tether straps. in this
chapter.
Carefully follow all of the manufacturers instructions included
with the safety seat you put in your vehicle. If you do not install
and use the safety seat properly, the child may be injured in a sudden
stop or collision.

119
Seating and Safety Restraints
Installing child safety seats in combination lap and shoulder belt
seating positions
1. Position the child safety seat in a
seat with a combination lap and
shoulder belt.

Air bags can kill or injure a child in a child seat. Never place a
rear facing child seat in front of an active bag. If you must use a
forward facing child seat in the front seat, position the vehicle seat
fully rearward and turn the passenger air bag off.

An air bag can kill or injure a child in a child seat. Child seats
should never be placed in the front seats, unless passenger air
bag switch is turned off, See Passenger air bag on/off switch.

Rear facing child seats should NEVER be placed in the front


seats unless the passenger airbag switch is turned off.

2. Pull down on the shoulder belt


and then grasp the shoulder belt
and lap belt together.

120
Seating and Safety Restraints
3. While holding the shoulder and
lap belt portions together, route the
tongue through the child seat
according to the child seat
manufacturers instructions. Be sure
the belt webbing is not twisted.

4. Insert the belt tongue into the


proper buckle (the buckle closest to
the direction the tongue is coming
from) for that seating position until
you hear and feel the latch engage.
Make sure the tongue is latched
securely by pulling on it.

5. To put the retractor in the


automatic locking mode, grasp the
shoulder portion of the belt and pull
downward until all of the belt is
extracted and a click is heard.

6. Allow the belt to retract. The belt will click as it retracts to indicate it
is in the automatic locking mode.

121
Seating and Safety Restraints
7. Pull the lap belt portion across
the child seat toward the buckle and
pull up on the shoulder belt while
pushing down with knee on the
child seat.

8. Allow the safety belt to retract to


remove any slack in the belt.
9. Before placing the child in the
seat, forcibly tilt the seat forward
and back to make sure the seat is
securely held in place. To check
this, grab the seat at the belt path
and attempt to move it side to side
and forward and back. There should
be no more than one inch of
movement for proper installation.
10. Try to pull the belt out of the retractor to make sure the retractor is
in the automatic locking mode (you should not be able to pull more belt
out). If the retractor is not locked, unbuckle the belt and repeat steps
two through nine.
Check to make sure the child seat is properly secured before each use.
Attaching safety seats with tether straps
Most forward-facing child safety seats include a tether strap which goes
over the back of the set and hooks to an anchoring point. Tether straps
are available as an accessory for many older safety seats. Contact the
manufacturer of your child safety seat for information about ordering a
tether strap.
Tether anchorage hardware
A tethered seat can be installed in the front seat. Put the tether strap
over the seatback and attach it to an anchor bracket.
An anchor bracket can be installed to the inside of the back panel of
your vehicle.
The anchor bracket must be installed using the instructions provided
with the tether anchorage hardware kit.

122
Seating and Safety Restraints
Tether anchorage hardware kits (part number 613D74) including
instructions, may be obtained at no charge from any Ford or
Lincoln/Mercury dealer.
If you have a Super Cab or Crew Cab, Ford recommends you attach
tether safety seats in the rear seating position (if possible) with the
tether strap attached to the tether anchorage bracket as shown in the
instructions provided with the tether anchor kit.
Tighten the anchor according to specifications. Otherwise, the
safety seat may not be properly secured and the child may be
injured in a sudden stop or collision.

Attaching child safety seats with tether straps


Most new forward-facing child safety seats include a tether strap which
goes over the back of the seat and hooks to an anchoring point. Tether
straps are available as an accessory for many older safety seats. Contact
the manufacturer of your child seat for information about ordering a
tether strap.
The passenger seats of your vehicle may be equipped with built-in tether
strap anchors located behind the seats as described below.
The tether anchors in your vehicle may be straps on the seatback or an
anchor bracket on the rear edge of the seat cushion or an anchor bracket
mounted to the body shell on the back panel.
The SuperCab rear seat has three straps behind the top of the seat back
that function as both routing loops for the tether straps and anchor
loops.
The tether strap anchors in your vehicle are in the following positions
(shown from top view):
Attach the tether strap only to the appropriate tether anchor as
shown. The tether strap may not work properly if attached
somewhere other than the correct tether anchor.

123
Seating and Safety Restraints
FSeries Regular Cab

FSeries SuperCab

FSeries Crew Cab

Tether strap attachment


1. Position the child safety seat on the seat cushion.
2. Route the child safety seat tether strap over the back of the seat.
3. Locate the correct anchor for the selected seating position.
4. You may need to pull the seatback forward to access the tether
anchors. Make sure the seat is locked in the upright position before
installing the child seat. Refer to the Folding down the rear seats
section in this chapter for information on how to operate the rear seats.
5. Clip the tether strap to the anchor as shown.

124
Seating and Safety Restraints
Front seat (SuperCab only)

Front seats (Regular Cab) and


Rear seats (Crew Cab only)

If the tether strap is clipped incorrectly, the child safety seat


may not be retained properly in the event of a collision.

6. Refer to the Installing child safety seats in combination lap and


shoulder belt seating positions section of this chapter for further
instructions to secure the child safety seat.
7. Tighten the child safety seat tether strap according to the
manufacturers instructions.
If the safety seat is not anchored properly, the risk of a child
being injured in a collision greatly increases.

Tether strap attachment rear SuperCab only


There are three loops of webbing just above the back of the rear seat
(along the bottom edge of the rear window) in the SuperCab. These
loops are to be used as both routing loops and anchor loops for child
safety seat tether straps.

125
Seating and Safety Restraints
Many tether straps cannot be tightened if the tether strap is hooked to
the loop directly behind the child seat. To provide a tight tether strap:
1. Route the tether strap through
the loop directly behind the child
seat.

2. Attach the strap hook onto the


loop behind an adjacent seating
position.

3. Install the child safety seat tightly


using the vehicle belts. Follow the
instructions in this chapter.
4. Tighten the tether strap
according to the child seat
manufacturers instructions.

A single loop can be used to route and anchor more than one child seat.
For example, the center loop can be used as a routing loop for a child
safety seat in the center rear seat and as an anchoring loop for child
seats installed in the outboard rear seats.

126
Driving
STARTING
Positions of the ignition
1. ACCESSORY, allows the electrical
accessories such as the radio to 4
3
operate while the engine is not
running. 5
2. LOCK, locks the steering wheel, 2
automatic transmission gearshift
lever and allows key removal.
3. OFF, shuts off the engine and all 1
accessories without locking the
steering wheel.
4. ON, all electrical circuits operational. Warning lights illuminated. Key
position when driving.
5. START, cranks the engine. Release the key as soon as the engine
starts.
Preparing to start your vehicle
Engine starting is controlled by the powertrain control system. This
system meets all Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment standard
requirements regulating the impulse electrical field strength of radio
noise.
When starting a fuel-injected engine, avoid pressing the accelerator
before or during starting. Only use the accelerator when you have
difficulty starting the engine. For more information on starting the
vehicle, refer to Starting the engine in this chapter.
Extended idling at high engine speeds can produce very high
temperatures in the engine and exhaust system, creating the risk
of fire or other damage.

Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle in dry grass or other dry
ground cover. The emission system heats up the engine
compartment and exhaust system, which can start a fire.

Do not start your vehicle in a closed garage or in other enclosed


areas. Exhaust fumes can be toxic. Always open the garage door
before you start the engine. See Guarding against exhaust fumes in
this chapter for more instructions.

127
Driving

If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle, have your dealer
inspect your vehicle immediately. Do not drive if you smell
exhaust fumes.

Important safety precautions


A computer system controls the engines idle revolutions per minute
(RPM). When the engine starts, the idle RPM runs higher than normal in
order to warm the engine. If the engine idle speed does not slow down
automatically, have the vehicle checked. Do not allow the vehicle to idle
for more than 10 minutes at high engine RPM.
Before starting the vehicle:
1. Make sure all vehicle occupants have buckled their safety belts. For
more information on safety belts and their proper usage, refer to the
Seating and safety restraints chapter.
2. Make sure the headlamps and vehicle accessories are off.
If starting a vehicle with an automatic transmission:
Make sure the parking brake is
set.

Make sure the gearshift is in P (Park).


If starting a vehicle with a manual transmission:
Make sure the parking brake is set.

128
Driving
Push the clutch pedal to the
floor.

3. Turn the key to 4 (ON) without


turning the key to 5 (START).
4
If there is difficulty in turning the 3
key, firmly rotate the steering wheel 5
left and right until the key turns
freely. This condition may occur 2
when:
front wheels are turned
1
front wheel is against the curb
steering wheel is turned when getting in or out of the vehicle

Make sure the corresponding lights illuminate or illuminate briefly. If a


light fails to illuminate, have the vehicle serviced.
If the drivers safety belt is fastened, the light may not illuminate.

Starting the engine


Note: Whenever you start your vehicle, release the key as soon as the
engine starts. Excessive cranking could damage the starter.

129
Driving
1. Turn the key to 5 (START)
without pressing the accelerator
pedal and release as soon as the 4
3
engine starts. The key will return to
4 (ON). 5
2. If the temperature is above 12 2
C (10 F) and the engine does not
start within five seconds on the first
try, turn the key to OFF, wait 10 1
seconds and try again.
3. If the temperature is below -12 C (10 F) and the engine does not
start in 15 seconds on the first try, turn the key OFF and wait 10
seconds and try again. If the engine does not start in two attempts, press
the accelerator pedal all the way to floor and hold. Turn the key to
START position.
4. When the engine starts, release the key, then release the accelerator
pedal gradually as the engine speeds up.
5. After idling for a few seconds, apply the brake, shift into gear and
drive.
Using the engine block heater (if equipped)
An engine block heater warms the
engine coolant, which improves
starting, warms up the engine faster
and allows the heater-defroster
system to respond quickly. Use of an
engine block heater is strongly
recommended if you live in a region
where temperatures reach -23C
(-10F) or below.
For best results, plug the heater in
at least three hours before starting the vehicle. Using the heater for
longer than three hours will not harm the engine, so the heater can be
plugged in the night before starting the vehicle.
To prevent electrical shock, do not use your heater with
ungrounded electrical systems or two-pronged (cheater)
adapters.

130
Driving
Guarding against exhaust fumes
Although odorless and colorless, carbon monoxide is present in exhaust
fumes. Take precautions to avoid its dangerous effects.
If you ever smell exhaust fumes of any kind inside your vehicle,
have your dealer inspect and fix your vehicle immediately. Do
not drive if you smell exhaust fumes. These fumes are harmful and
could kill you.

Have the exhaust and body ventilation systems checked whenever:


the vehicle is raised for service.
the sound of the exhaust system changes.
the vehicle has been damaged in a collision.
WARNING: Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and
certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to
the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other
reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and
certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known
to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other
reproductive harm.

Important ventilating information


If the engine is idling while the vehicle is stopped in an open area for
long periods of time, open the windows at least 2.5 cm (one inch).
Adjust the heating or air conditioning (if equipped) to bring in fresh air.
Improve vehicle ventilation by keeping all air inlet vents clear of snow,
leaves and other debris.
BRAKES
Your service brakes are self-adjusting. Refer to the scheduled
maintenance guide for scheduled maintenance.
Occasional brake noise is normal and often does not indicate a
performance concern with the vehicles brake system. In normal
operation, automotive brake systems may emit occasional or intermittent
squeal or groan noises when the brakes are applied. Such noises are
usually heard during the first few brake applications in the morning;
however, they may be heard at any time while braking and can be
aggravated by environmental conditions such as cold, heat, moisture,

131
Driving
road dust, salt or mud. If a metal-to-metal, continuous grinding or
continuous squeal sound is present while braking, the brake linings
may be worn-out and should be inspected by a qualified service
technician.
If you are driving down a long or steep hill, shift to a lower gear.
Do not apply your brakes continuously, as they may overheat
and become less effective.

Rear anti-lock brake system (RABS) (if equipped)


Rear Anti-lock Brake System (RABS) is designed to help you maintain
directional stability in emergency stopping situations. With RABS, the
rear brakes are kept from locking during panic stops; however, the front
wheels can lock because they are not controlled by RABS.
A clicking noise and slight pedal pulsation during RABS braking events
indicates the RABS is functioning. Pedal pulsation coupled with clicking
noise while braking under panic conditions on loose gravel, wet or snowy
roads is normal and indicates proper functioning of the vehicles RABS. If
the vehicle has continuous vibration or shudder in the steering wheel
while braking, the vehicle should be inspected by a qualified service
technician.
The RABS operates by detecting the onset of rear wheel lockup during
brake applications and compensating for this tendency.
RABS warning lamp
The ABS warning lamp in the instrument cluster momentarily illuminates
when the ignition is turned to the ON position. If the light does not
illuminate momentarily at start up, remains on or continues to flash, the
ABS needs to be serviced.
With the ABS light on, the anti-lock
brake system is disabled and normal
braking is still effective unless the
brake warning light also remains
illuminated with parking brake released. (If your brake warning lamp
illuminates, have your vehicle serviced immediately.)
Using RABS
In an emergency, applying full pressure may cause the front wheels to
lock. If the front brakes lock, the vehicle cannot be steered. You
should apply the brakes with steadily increasing force, as if

132
Driving
squeezing the brakes. If you feel the front wheels begin to lock,
momentarily release the pedal and repeat the squeeze technique.
We recommend that you familiarize yourself with how the RABS
performs. However, avoid unnecessary risks.
Four-wheel anti-lock brake system (ABS) (if equipped)
On vehicles equipped with a fourwheel anti-lock braking system (ABS),
a noise from the hydraulic pump motor and pulsation in the pedal may
be observed during ABS braking events. Pedal pulsation coupled with
noise while braking under panic conditions or on loose gravel, bumps,
wet or snowy roads is normal and indicates proper functioning of the
vehicles anti-lock brake system. If the vehicle has continuous vibration
or shudder in the steering wheel while braking, the vehicle should be
inspected by a qualified service technician.
The ABS operates by detecting the
onset of wheel lockup during brake
applications and compensates for
this tendency. The wheels are
prevented from locking even when
the brakes are firmly applied. The
accompanying illustration depicts
the advantage of an ABS equipped
vehicle (on bottom) to a non-ABS
equipped vehicle (on top) during hard braking with loss of front braking
traction.
Using four wheel ABS
In an emergency or when maximum efficiency from the four wheel
ABS is required, apply continuous force on the brake. The four wheel
ABS will be activated immediately, thus allowing you to retain full
steering control of your vehicle and, providing there is sufficient
space, will enable you to avoid obstacles and bring the vehicle to a
controlled stop.
The anti-lock system does not reduce stopping distance. Always leave
enough room between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you to
stop.
We recommend that you familiarize yourself with this braking
technique. However, avoid taking any unnecessary risks.
ABS warning lamp ABS
The ABS warning lamp in the instrument cluster momentarily illuminates
when the ignition is turned to the ON position. If the light does not
illuminate momentarily at start up, remains on or continues to flash, the
ABS needs to be serviced.

133
Driving
With the ABS light on, the anti-lock
brake system is disabled and normal
braking is still effective unless the
brake warning light also remains
illuminated with parking brake released. (If your brake warning lamp
illuminates, have your vehicle serviced immediately.)

Parking brake
Apply the parking brake whenever
the vehicle is parked. To set the
parking brake, press the parking
brake pedal down until the pedal
stops.

The BRAKE warning lamp in the


instrument cluster illuminates and
remains illuminated (when the
ignition is turned ON) until the
parking brake is released.
Always set the parking brake fully and make sure that the
gearshift is securely latched in P (Park) (automatic
transmission) or in 1 (First) (manual transmission).

The parking brake is not recommended to stop a moving vehicle.


However, if the normal brakes fail, the parking brake can be used to stop
your vehicle in an emergency. Since the parking brake applies only the
rear brakes, the vehicles stopping distance will increase greatly and the
handling of your vehicle will be adversely affected.

134
Driving
Pull the release lever to release the
brake. Driving with the parking
brake on will cause the brakes to PULL

wear out quickly and reduce fuel


economy.

STEERING YOUR VEHICLE


Your vehicle is equipped with power steering. Power steering uses energy
from the engine to help steer the vehicle.
Never hold the steering wheel to the extreme right or the extreme left
position for more than a few seconds when the engine is running. This
action could damage the power steering pump.
If the amount of effort needed to steer your vehicle changes at a
constant vehicle speed, have the power steering system checked. If the
power steering system breaks down (or if the engine is turned off), you
can steer the vehicle manually, but it takes more effort.
After any severe impact such as striking large potholes, sliding into curbs
on icy roads or a collision involving the front end, have the front
suspension and steering checked for possible damage.

TRACTION-LOK AXLE (IF EQUIPPED)


This axle provides added traction on slippery surfaces, particularly when
one wheel is on a poor traction surface. Under normal conditions, the
Traction-Lok axle functions like a standard rear axle.
Extended use of other than the manufacturers specified size tires on a
Traction-Lok rear axle could result in a permanent reduction in
effectiveness. This loss of effectiveness does not affect normal driving
and should not be noticeable to the driver.
To reduce the risk of injury, never run the engine with one wheel
off the ground, such as when changing a tire.

135
Driving
PREPARING TO DRIVE YOUR VEHICLE
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than
other types of vehicles.

In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely


to die than a person wearing a seat belt.

Your vehicle has special design and equipment features to make it


capable of performing in a wide variety of circumstances. These special
design features, such as larger tires and increased ground clearance, give
the vehicle a higher center of gravity than a passenger car.
Vehicles with a higher center of gravity such as utility and
four-wheel drive vehicles handle differently than vehicles with a
lower center of gravity. Utility and four-wheel drive vehicles are not
designed for cornering at speeds as high as passenger cars any more
than low-slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily under
off-road conditions. Avoid sharp turns, excessive speed and abrupt
maneuvers in these vehicles. Failure to drive cautiously could result in
an increased risk of vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.

Loaded vehicles, with a higher center of gravity, may handle


differently than unloaded vehicles. Extra precautions, such as
slower speeds and increased stopping distance, should be taken when
driving a heavily loaded vehicle.

Your vehicle has the capability to haul more cargo and people than most
passenger cars. Depending upon the type and placement of the load,
hauling people and cargo may raise the center of gravity of the vehicle.
Use extra caution while becoming familiar with your vehicle. Know the
capabilities and limitations of both you as a driver and your vehicle.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION OPERATION (IF EQUIPPED)
Brake-shift interlock
This vehicle is equipped with a brake-shift interlock feature that prevents
the gearshift lever from being moved from P (Park) when the ignition is
in the ON position unless brake pedal is depressed.
If you cannot move the gearshift lever out of P (Park) with ignition in
the ON position and the brake pedal depressed:

136
Driving
1. Apply the parking brake, turn ignition to the LOCK position, then
remove the key.
2. Reinsert the key and turn the ignition to the OFF position.
3. Press and hold down the brake pedal and shift into N (Neutral).
4. Start the vehicle.
If it is necessary to use the above procedure to move the gearshift lever,
it is possible that a fuse has blown or the vehicles brakelamps are not
operating properly. Refer to Fuses and relays in the Roadside
emergencies chapter.
Do not drive your vehicle until you verify that the brakelamps
are working.

If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow it may be rocked out by


shifting from forward and reverse gears, stopping between shifts, in a
steady pattern. Press lightly on the accelerator in each gear.
Do not rock the vehicle for more than a few minutes. The
transmission and tires may be damaged or the engine may
overheat.
Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the gearshift is
latched in P (Park). Turn the ignition to the LOCK position and
remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle.

If the parking brake is fully released, but the brake warning lamp
remains illuminated, the brakes may not be working properly.
See your dealer or a qualified service technician.

Driving with a 4speed automatic transmission


Understanding gearshift positions
To put your vehicle in gear, start the engine, depress the brake pedal,
then move gearshift lever out of P (Park).
Hold the brake pedal down while you move the gearshift lever
from P (Park) to another position. If you do not hold the brake
pedal down, your vehicle may move unexpectedly and injure someone.

137
Driving
P (Park)
Always come to a complete stop
before shifting into P (Park). Make
sure the gearshift lever is securely
latched in P (Park). This position
locks the transmission and prevents
the rear wheels from turning.
Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the gearshift
lever is latched in P (Park). Turn off the ignition whenever you
leave your vehicle.

R (Reverse)
With the gearshift lever in R
(Reverse), the vehicle will move
backward. Always come to a
complete stop before shifting into
and out of R (Reverse).
N (Neutral)
With the gearshift lever in N
(Neutral), the vehicle can be started
and is free to roll. Hold the brake
pedal down while in this gear.
(Overdrive)
The normal driving position for the
best fuel economy. Transmission
operates in gears one through four.

(Overdrive) can be deactivated


by pressing the transmission control OVERDRIVE OFF
switch (TCS) on the end of the
gearshift lever.
The transmission control indicator
light (TCIL) (the word OFF) on the
end of the gearshift lever will OVERDRIVE
illuminate.

138
Driving
Drive Not shown on the display. Activate by pressing the transmission
control switch (TCS) on the end of the gearshift lever with the gearshift
in the position. The TCIL (the word OFF) will illuminate on the
gearshift lever. Transmission operates in gears one through three.
(Drive) provides more engine braking than (Overdrive) and is useful
when:
driving with a heavy load.
towing a trailer up or down steep hills.
additional engine downhill braking is desired. If towing a trailer, refer
to Driving while you tow in the Trailer towing section.
To return to (Overdrive) mode, press the transmission control switch
(TCS). The TCIL (the word OFF) will no longer be illuminated.
Each time the vehicle is started, the transmission will automatically
return to normal overdrive mode.
Every time the vehicle is shut off and restarted, you must press the
transmission control switch to cancel overdrive operation if driving in
overdrive is not desired.
2 (Second)
Use 2 (Second) to start-up on
slippery roads or to provide
additional engine braking on
downgrades.
1 (First)
Use 1 (Low) to provide maximum
engine braking on steep
downgrades. Upshifts can be made
by shifting to 2 (Second) or to
(Overdrive). Selecting 1 (Low) at higher speeds causes the transmission
to shift to a lower gear, and will shift to 1 (Low) after vehicle decelerates
to the proper speed.
Forced Downshifts
To gain acceleration in (Overdrive) or Drive (O/D OFF) when
passing another vehicle, push the accelerator to the floor. The
transmission will downshift to the appropriate gear: third, second or first
gear.

139
Driving
Shift strategy (4R100 automatic transmission)
To account for customer driving habits and conditions, your 4R100
automatic transmission electronically controls the shift quality by using
an adaptive learning strategy. The adaptive learning strategy is
maintained by power from the battery. When the battery is disconnected
or a new battery is installed, the transmission must relearn its adaptive
strategy. Optimal shifting will resume within a few hundred kilometers
(miles) of operation.
If the shift quality does not improve within a few hundred
kilometers (miles) of operation, or if the downshifts and other
throttle conditions do not function normally, see your dealer or a
qualified service technician as soon as possible.

MANUAL TRANSMISSION OPERATION (IF EQUIPPED)

Using the clutch


Vehicles equipped with a manual transmission have a starter interlock
that prevents cranking the engine unless the clutch pedal is fully
depressed.
When starting a vehicle with a manual transmission, you must:
1. Make sure the parking brake is
fully set.
2. Depress the clutch pedal fully.
3. Put the gearshift lever in N
(Neutral).

140
Driving
4. Turn the ignition to position 5
(START) to start the engine, let the 4
engine idle for a few seconds. 3
5. Depress the brake pedal. 5
6. Release the parking brake. 2
7. Move the gearshift lever to the
desired gear. 1
8. Release the brake pedal.
9. Slowly release the clutch pedal
while slowly pressing down on the
accelerator pedal.

Do not drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal and do not use
the clutch to hold your vehicle at a standstill while waiting on a hill.
These actions will greatly reduce clutch life.

Recommended shift speeds


Downshift according to the following charts for your specific
engine/drivetrain combination:
Maximum downshift speeds1
6-speed transmission
Shift from: Transfer case position (if equipped)2
2H or 4H 4L
D (Overdrive) - 4 72 km/h (45 mph) 26 km/h (16 mph)
4-3 56 km/h (35 mph) 19 km/h (12 mph)
3-2 32 km/h (20 mph) 13 km/h (8 mph)
2-1 8 km/h (5 mph) 3 km/h (2 mph)
1 - LO Only shift to LO when at a stop.
1
Use 2H or 4H for 4WD equipped vehicles.
2
Downshift at lower speeds when driving on slippery surfaces.

141
Driving
Parking your vehicle
1. Disengage the clutch, apply brake
and shift into N (Neutral).

2. Set parking brake.


3. Shift into 1 (First).

142
Driving
4. Turn the ignition key to position
3 (OFF).
4
3
5
2

Do not park your vehicle in Neutral, it may move unexpectedly


and injure someone. Use 1 (First) gear and set the parking brake
fully.

Reverse
Make sure that your vehicle is at a complete stop before you shift into R
(Reverse). Failure to do so may damage the transmission.
Put the gearshift lever in N (Neutral) and wait at least three seconds
before shifting into R (Reverse).
With the 6speed transmission you
can shift into R (Reverse) by
moving the gearshift to the extreme
left from N (Neutral). R 1 3 D

L 2 4

143
Driving
Removing key from ignition
Turn the ignition key to position
2.
Push the release lever forward
and rotate the key towards you
and remove.

REVERSE SENSING SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)


The reverse sensing system (RSS) sounds a tone to warn the driver of
obstacles near the rear bumper when the reverse gear is selected.
To help avoid personal injury, please read and understand the
limitations on the reverse sensing system described below.
Reverse sensing is only an assist for some (generally large and fixed)
objects when moving in reverse on a flat surface at parking speeds of
approximately 6 km/h (4 mph) or less. The weather may also affect the
function of RSS. RSS may have reduced performance, or be activated
in inclement weather. It is the drivers responsibility for ensuring that
their path is clear when operating the vehicle.

To help avoid personal injury, always use caution when in


reverse and when using the reverse sensing system.

This system is not designed to prevent contact with small or


moving objects. The system is designed to provide a warning to
assist the driver in detecting large stationary objects to avoid damaging
the vehicle. The system may not detect smaller objects, particularly
those close to the ground.

144
Driving
The RSS will assist the driver in detecting certain objects while the
vehicle slowly moves in reverse at speeds less than 6 km/h (4 mph). The
RSS is not effective at speeds greater than 6 km/h (4 mph) and may not
detect certain angular or moving objects.
The reverse sensing system detects
obstacles within approximately 1.8
meters (5.9 ft.) of the rear bumper
with a decreased coverage area at
the outer corners of the bumper,
(refer to the figures for approximate
zone coverage areas). As you move
closer to the obstacle, the rate of
the tone increases. When the
distance to the obstacle is less than
25.0 cm (10 in.), the tone will sound
continuously. If the system detects a
stationary or receding object further
than 25.0 cm (10 in.) from the side
of the vehicle, the tone will sound
for only three seconds. Once the
system detects an object
approaching, the tone will sound
again.

The reverse sensing system is


automatically enabled when the gear OFF
selector is placed in R (Reverse)
and the ignition is ON. A reverse
sensing control allows the driver to
disable the reverse sensing system only when the ignition is ON, and the
gear selector is in R (Reverse).
The OFF indicator remains illuminated when the system is disabled. The
system defaults to ON every time the reverse gear is selected. Press the
control to disable or enable the system.
The indicator will remain illuminated to indicate a failure of the reverse
sensing system.
The reverse sensing system may have reduced performance or an
increased chance of false detection if the tailgate is not locked in the
vertical position. When the tailgate is down, the driver may experience a

145
Driving
continuous or intermittent tone. This also applies if items being hauled in
the box do not fit entirely inside and protrude rearward.
Always keep the sensors (located on the rear bumper/fascia) free
from dirt, snow and ice (do not clean the sensors with sharp
objects). These elements may cause the system to operate
inaccurately.
If the vehicle sustains damage to the rear bumper/fascia, leaving
it misaligned or bent, the sensing zone may be altered causing
inaccurate measurement of obstacles or false alarms.
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE (4WD) OPERATION (IF EQUIPPED)
For important information regarding safe operation of this type
of vehicle, see Preparing to drive your vehicle in this chapter.

When fourwheel drive (4WD) is engaged, power is supplied to all four


wheels through a transfer case. 4WD can be selected when additional
driving power is desired.
4WD operation is not recommended on dry pavement. Doing so could
result in difficult disengagement of the transfer case, increased tire wear
and decreased fuel economy.
Manual 4x4 system (if equipped)
The 4WD system is engaged or
disengaged by rotating the control
for both front wheel hub locks from
the FREE or LOCK position, then
manually engaging or disengaging
the transfer case with the
floor-mounted shifter. For increased
fuel economy in 2WD, rotate both
hub locks to the FREE position.
For proper operation, make
sure that the arrow and the
indicator dot on the hub are
aligned, and that both hub
locks are set to the same
position (both set to LOCK or both set to FREE).
Electronic shift on the fly (ESOF) 4x4 system (if equipped)
If equipped with the Electronic Shift 4WD System, and 4WD Low
is selected while the vehicle is moving, the 4WD system will not

146
Driving
engage. This is normal and should be no reason for concern.
Before 4WD Low can be engaged, the vehicle must be brought to
a complete stop, the brake pedal depressed and the transmission
placed in N (Neutral ) (on automatic transmissions or the clutch
pedal depressed on manual transmissions).
The 4WD system:
provides 4x4 High engagement and disengagement while the vehicle is
moving.
is operated by a rotary control located on the instrument panel that
allows you select 2WD, 4x4 High or 4x4 Low operation.
uses auto-manual hub locks that can be engaged and disengaged
automatically based on the 4x4 mode selected.
auto-manual hub locks can be
manually overridden by rotating
the hub lock control from AUTO
to LOCK if desired.
automatic operation of the
hub locks is recommended, and
will increase fuel economy
For proper operation, make
sure that the arrow and the
indicator dot on the hub are
aligned, and that both hub
locks are set the same (both
set to AUTO or both set to
LOCK).
4WD system indicator lights
The 4WD system indicator lights illuminate only under the following
conditions. If these lights illuminate when driving in 2WD, contact your
Ford dealer as soon as possible.
4x4- momentarily illuminates
after the engine is started. 4x4
Illuminates when 4H (4x4 High)
or 4L (4x4 Low) is engaged.
LOW RANGE momentarily LOW
illuminates when the ignition is
turned to the ON position. RANGE
Illuminates when 4L (4x4 Low) is
engaged.

147
Driving
Using a manual 4WD system (if equipped)
2H (2WD High) For general on-road driving. Sends power to the rear
wheels only.
4H (4WD High) For winter and off-road conditions. Sends power to
front and rear wheels.
N (Neutral) Only used when towing the vehicle.
4L (4WD Low) For low-speed off-road applications that require extra
power such as steep grades, deep sand or pulling a boat out of the water.
Sends power to front and rear wheels.
Note: Some noise may be heard as the 4WD system shifts or engages.
This is normal.
Shifting from 2H (2WD High) to 4H (4WD High)
Engage the locking hubs by rotating
the hub lock control from FREE to
LOCK, then move the transfer case
lever from 2H (2WD High) to 4H
(4WD High).
For proper operation, make
sure that the arrow and the
indicator dot on the hub are
aligned, and that both hubs
are set to LOCK.

Do not shift into 4H (4WD High)


with the rear wheels slipping. 2H
4H
N
4L

148
Driving
Shifting from 4H (4WD High) to 2H (2WD High)
Move the transfer case lever to 2H
(2WD High) at a stop or any 2H
forward speed up to 88 km/h (55 4H
mph).
With the vehicle at complete stop, N
disengage the locking hubs 4L
(optional) by rotating the hub lock
control from LOCK to FREE.
For proper operation, make sure that the arrow and the
indicator dot on the hub are aligned, and that both hubs are set
to FREE

Shifting from 4H (4WD High) to 4L (4WD Low)


1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
2. Depress the brake.
3. Place the gearshift lever in N (Neutral) (automatic transmission) or
depress the clutch (manual transmission).
4. Move the transfer case shift lever
through N (Neutral) directly to 4L 2H
(4WD Low). 4H
5. If the transfer case will not
engage into 4L (4WD Low), drive N
the vehicle above 8 km/h (5 mph), 4L
then repeat steps 1 through 4.

Shifting from 4L (4WD Low) to 4H (4WD High) or 2H (2WD High)


1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
2. Depress the brake.
3. Place the gearshift lever in N (Neutral) (automatic transmission) or
depress the clutch (manual transmission).

149
Driving
4. Move the transfer case shift lever
through N (Neutral) directly to 4H 2H
(4WD High) or 2H (2WD High). 4H
5. If the transfer case will not
disengage from 4L (4WD Low), N
drive the vehicle above 8 km/h (5 4L
mph), then repeat steps 1 through
4.
6. If shifting to 2H (2WD High) with the vehicle at a complete stop,
disengage the locking hubs (optional) by rotating the hub lock control
from LOCK to FREE.
Using the N (Neutral) position
The transfer case neutral position overrides the transmission and
puts the vehicle in neutral regardless of transmission gearshift
lever position. The vehicle can move forward or backwards.
This position should only be used
when towing the vehicle. 2H
4H
N
4L

Do not leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the
N (Neutral) position. Always set the parking brake fully and turn
off the ignition when leaving the vehicle.

Using the electronic shift 4WD system (if equipped)


Positions of the electronic shift system
To prevent damage, the electronic shift 4WD system is designed
to allow up to 45 seconds before a shift command is performed.
In the event that conflicting shift commands are selected, allow
up to 45 seconds for the shift command to be performed prior to
reporting any shift concerns to your dealer.
2H (2WD High) For general on-road driving. Sends power to the rear
wheels only.
4H (4WD High) For winter and off-road conditions. Sends power to
front and rear wheels.

150
Driving
4L (4WD Low) For low-speed off-road cond applications that require
extra power such as steep grades, deep sand or pulling a boat out of the
water. Sends power to front and rear wheels.
Note: Some noise may be heard as the 4WD system shifts or engages.
This is normal.
Shifting from 2WD (2WD High) to 4x4 HIGH (4WD High)
Rotate the 4WD control to the 4x4
HIGH position at speeds up to 88 4X4 4X4
km/h (55 mph). 2WD
HIGH
LOW

To prevent damage, the


electronic shift 4WD system is
designed to engage 4x4 HIGH
(4WD High) when the vehicle
is moving. If shifted to 4x4
HIGH (4WD HIGH) while at
complete stop, 4x4 may not
engage and the 4x4 indicator
may not illuminate until the vehicle is driven above 8 km/h (5
mph).
Do not shift into 4x4 HIGH with the rear wheels slipping.
Shifting from 4x4 HIGH (4WD High) to 2WD (2WD High)
Rotate the 4WD control to 2WD at
any forward speed. Disengagement 4X4
HIGH 4X4
2WD LOW
of the transfer case and front hubs
may be delayed due to torque bind
which is caused by driving on dry
hard surfaces or performing tight
turns while using the 4WD system.

You do not need to operate the vehicle in R (Reverse) to disengage


your front hubs, but it will eliminate any torque bind and allow the
system to immediately disengage.
Shifting from 4x4 HIGH (4WD High) to 4x4 LOW (4WD Low)
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
2. Depress the brake.

151
Driving
3. Place the gearshift in N (Neutral) (automatic transmission) or depress
the clutch (manual transmission).
4. Move the 4WD control to the 4x4
LOW position. 4X4
HIGH 4X4
2WD LOW
5. Hold the shift conditions until the
LOW RANGE indicator light
illuminates.
6. If the LOW RANGE indicator light
does not illuminate within 15
seconds, drive the vehicle above 8
km/h (5 mph), then repeat steps 1
through 5 before reporting any shift
concerns to your dealer.
Shifting from 4x4 LOW (4WD Low) to 4x4 HIGH (4WD High) or 2WD
(2WD High)
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
2. Depress the brake.
3. Place the gearshift in N (Neutral) (automatic transmission) or depress
the clutch (manual transmission).
4. Move the 4WD control to the 4x4
HIGH (4WD High) or 2WD (2WD 4X4
HIGH 4X4
High) position. 2WD LOW

5. Hold the shift conditions until the


LOW RANGE indicator light shuts
off.
6. If the LOW RANGE indicator light
does not shut off within 15
seconds, drive the vehicle above 8
km/h (5 mph), then repeat steps 1
through 5 before reporting any shift concerns to your dealer.
Driving off-road with truck and utility vehicles
4WD vehicles are specially equipped for driving on sand, snow, mud and
rough terrain and have operating characteristics that are somewhat
different from conventional vehicles, both on and off the road.
How your vehicle differs from other vehicles
Truck and utility vehicles can differ from some other vehicles. Your
vehicle may be higher to allow it to travel over rough terrain without
getting hung up or damaging underbody components.

152
Driving
The differences that make your vehicle so versatile also make it handle
differently than an ordinary passenger car.
Maintain steering wheel control at all times, especially in rough terrain.
Since sudden changes in terrain can result in abrupt steering wheel
motion, make sure you grip the steering wheel from the outside. Do not
grip the spokes.
Drive cautiously to avoid vehicle damage from concealed objects such as
rocks and stumps.
You should either know the terrain or examine maps of the area before
driving. Map out your route before driving in the area. To maintain
steering and braking control of your vehicle, you must have all four
wheels on the ground and they must be rolling, not sliding or spinning.
Basic operating principles
Do not use 4WD on dry, hard surfaced roads. Doing so will produce
excessive noise, increase tire wear and may damage drive components.
4WD modes are only intended for consistently slippery or loose
surfaces.
Drive slower in strong crosswinds which can affect the normal steering
characteristics of your vehicle.
Be extremely careful when driving on pavement made slippery by
loose sand, water, gravel, snow or ice.
If your vehicle goes off the edge of the pavement
If your vehicle goes off the edge of the pavement, slow down, but
avoid severe brake application, Ease the vehicle back onto the
pavement only after reducing your speed. Do not turn the steering
wheel too sharply while returning to the road surface.
It may be safer to stay on the apron or shoulder of the road and slow
down gradually before returning to the pavement. You may lose
control if you do not slow down or if you turn the steering wheel too
sharply or abruptly.
It often may be less risky to strike small inanimate objects, such as
highway reflectors, with minor damage to your vehicle rather than
attempt a sudden return to the pavement which could cause the
vehicle to slide sideways out of control or roll over. Remember, your
safety and the safety of others should be your primary concern.
If your vehicle gets stuck
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow it may be rocked out by
shifting between forward and reverse gears, stopping between shifts, in a
steady pattern. Press lightly on the accelerator in each gear.

153
Driving
Do not rock the vehicle if the engine is not at normal operating
temperature or damage to the transmission may occur.
Do not rock the vehicle for more than a few minutes or damage
to the transmission and tires may occur or the engine may
overheat.
Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the gearshift is
latched in P (Park). Turn the ignition to the LOCK position and
remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle.

If the parking brake is fully released, but the brake warning lamp
remains illuminated, the brakes may not be working properly.
See your dealer or a qualified service technician.

Do not spin the wheels at over 56 km/h (35 mph). The tires may
fail and injure a passenger or bystander.

Refer to Transmission temperature gauge in the Instrument cluster


chapter for transmission fluid temperature information.
Emergency maneuvers
In an unavoidable emergency situation where a sudden sharp turn
must be made, remember to avoid over-driving your vehicle, i.e.,
turn the steering wheel only as rapidly and as far as required to avoid
the emergency. Excessive steering will result in less vehicle control,
not more. Additionally, smooth variations of the accelerator and/or
brake pedal pressure should be utilized if changes in vehicle speed are
called for. Avoid abrupt steering, acceleration or braking. Use all
available road surface to return the vehicle to a safe direction of
travel.
In the event of an emergency stop, avoid skidding the tires and do not
attempt any sharp steering wheel movements.
If the vehicle goes from one type of surface to another (i.e., from
concrete to gravel) there will be a change in the way the vehicle
responds to a maneuver (steering, acceleration or braking). Again,
avoid these abrupt inputs.
Parking
On some 4WD vehicles, when the transfer case is in the N (Neutral)
position, the engine and transmission are disconnected from the rest of

154
Driving
the driveline. Therefore, the vehicle is free to roll even if the automatic
transmission is in P (Park) or the manual transmission is in gear. Do not
leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in N (Neutral)
position. Always set the parking brake fully and turn off the ignition
when leaving the vehicle.
4WD Systems
4WD (when you select a 4WD mode), uses all four wheels to power the
vehicle. This increases traction, enabling you to drive over terrain and
road conditions that a conventional two-wheel drive vehicle cant.
Power is supplied to all four wheels
through a transfer case. On 4WD
vehicles, the transfer case allows
you to select 4WD when necessary.
Information on transfer case
operation and shifting procedures
can be found in the Driving
chapter. Information on transfer
case maintenance can be found in the Maintenance and specifications
chapter. You should become thoroughly familiar with this information
before you operate your vehicle.
Normal characteristics
On some 4WD models, the initial shift from two-wheel drive to 4x4 while
the vehicle is moving can cause some momentary clunk and ratcheting
sounds. This is the front drivetrain coming up to speed and the
automatic locking hubs engaging and is not cause for concern.
Sand
When driving over sand, try to keep all four wheels on the most solid
area of the trail. Avoid reducing the tire pressures but shift to a lower
gear and drive steadily through the terrain. Apply the accelerator slowly
and avoid spinning the wheels.
If you must reduce the tire pressure for whatever reason in sand, make
sure you re-inflate the tires as soon as possible.
Avoid excessive speed because vehicle momentum can work against you
and cause the vehicle to become stuck to the point that assistance may
be required from another vehicle. Remember, you may be able to back
out the way you came if you proceed with caution.

155
Driving
Mud and water
If you must drive through high
water, drive slowly. Traction or
brake capability may be limited.
When driving through water,
determine the depth; avoid water
higher than the bottom of the hubs
(if possible) and proceed slowly. If
the ignition system gets wet, the
vehicle may stall.

Once through water, always try the brakes. Wet brakes do not stop the
vehicle as effectively as dry brakes. Drying can be improved by moving
your vehicle slowly while applying light pressure on the brake pedal.
Be cautious of sudden changes in vehicle speed or direction when you
are driving in mud. Even 4WD vehicles can lose traction in slick mud. As
when you are driving over sand, apply the accelerator slowly and avoid
spinning your wheels. If the vehicle does slide, steer in the direction of
the slide until you regain control of the vehicle.
If the transmission, transfer case or front axle are submerged in water,
their fluids should be checked and changed, if necessary.
Water intrusion into the transmission may damage the
transmission.
Refer to Transmission temperature gauge in the Instrument cluster
chapter for transmission fluid temperature information.
If the front or rear axle is submerged in water, the axle lubricant should
be replaced.
After driving through mud, clean off residue stuck to rotating driveshafts
and tires. Excess mud stuck on tires and rotating driveshafts causes an
imbalance that could damage drive components.

156
Driving
Tread Lightly is an educational
program designed to increase public
awareness of land-use regulations
and responsibilities in our nations
wilderness areas. Ford joins the U.S.
Forest Service and the Bureau of Land Management in encouraging you
to help preserve our national forest and other public and private lands by
treading lightly.
Driving on hilly or sloping terrain
Although natural obstacles may make it necessary to travel diagonally up
or down a hill or steep incline, you should always try to drive straight up
or straight down. Avoid driving crosswise or turning on steep
slopes or hills. A danger lies in losing traction, slipping sideways and
possibly rolling over. Whenever driving on a hill, determine beforehand
the route you will use. Do not drive over the crest of a hill without
seeing what conditions are on the other side. Do not drive in reverse
over a hill without the aid of an observer.
When climbing a steep slope or hill,
start in a lower gear rather than
downshifting to a lower gear from a
higher gear once the ascent has
started. This reduces strain on the
engine and the possibility of stalling.
If you do stall out, do not try to
turn around because you might roll
over. It is better to back down to a
safe location.
Apply just enough power to the
wheels to climb the hill. Too much
power will cause the tires to slip,
spin or lose traction, resulting in
loss of vehicle control.

157
Driving
Descend a hill in the same gear you
would use to climb up the hill to
avoid excessive brake application
and brake overheating. Do not
descend in neutral, disengage
overdrive or manually shift to a
lower gear. When descending a
steep hill, avoid sudden hard
braking as you could lose control.
When you brake hard, the front
wheels cant turn and if they arent
turning, you wont be able to steer.
The front wheels have to be turning in order to steer the vehicle. Rapid
pumping of the brake pedal will help you slow the vehicle and still
maintain steering control.
If your vehicle has anti-lock brakes, apply the brakes steadily. Do not
pump the brakes.
Driving on snow and ice
4WD vehicles have advantages over 2WD vehicles in snow and ice but
can skid like any other vehicle.
Should you start to slide while driving on snowy or icy roads, turn the
steering wheel in the direction of the slide until you regain control.
Avoid sudden applications of power and quick changes of direction on
snow and ice. Apply the accelerator slowly and steadily when starting
from a full stop.
Avoid sudden braking as well. Although a 4WD vehicle may accelerate
better than a two-wheel drive vehicle in snow and ice, it wont stop any
faster, because as in other vehicles, braking occurs at all four wheels. Do
not become overconfident as to road conditions.
Make sure you allow sufficient distance between you and other vehicles
for stopping as well as drive slower than usual and consider using one of
the lower gears. In emergency stopping situations, avoid locking of the
wheels. Use a squeeze technique, push on the brake pedal with a
steadily increasing force which allows the wheels to brake yet continue
to roll so that you may steer in the direction you want to travel. If you
lock the wheels, release the brake pedal and repeat the squeeze
technique. If your vehicle is equipped with a Four Wheel Anti-Lock
Brake System (ABS), apply the brake steadily. Do not pump the
brakes. Refer to the Brakes section of this chapter for additional
information on the operation of the anti-lock brake system.

158
Driving
Never drive with chains on the front tires of 4WD vehicles without also
putting them on the rear tires. This could cause the rear to slide and
swing around during braking.
Tires, Replacement Requirements
Do not use a size and type of tire and wheel other than that
originally provided by Ford because it can affect the safety and
performance of your vehicle, which could lead to loss of vehicle control
or roll over and serious injury.

Make sure all tires and wheels on the vehicle are of the same size, type,
tread design, brand and load-carrying capacity. If you have questions
regarding tire replacement, see an authorized Ford or Lincoln/Mercury
dealer.
If you nevertheless decide to equip your 4WD for off-road use with tires
larger than what Ford recommends, you should not use these tires for
highway driving.
If you use any tire/wheel combination not recommended by Ford, it may
adversely affect vehicle handling and could cause steering, suspension,
axle or transfer case failure.
Do not useaftermarket lift kits or other suspension modifications,
whether or not they are used with larger tires and wheels.
These aftermarket lift kits could adversely affect the vehicles handling
characteristics, which could lead to loss of vehicle control or roll over
and serious injury.
Tires can be damaged during off-road use. For your safety, tires that are
damaged should not be used for highway driving because they are more
likely to blow out or fail.
You should carefully observe the recommended tire inflation pressure
found on the safety compliance certification label attached to the left
front door lock facing or door latch post pillar. Failure to follow tire
pressure recommendations can adversely affect the way your vehicle
handles. Do not exceed the Ford recommended pressure even if it is less
than the maximum pressure allowed for the tire.

159
Driving
Each day before you drive, check
your tires. If one looks lower than
the others, use a tire gauge to check
pressure of all tires, and adjust if
required. Check tire pressure with a
tire gauge every few weeks
(including spare). Safe operation
requires tires that are neither
underinflated nor overloaded.

Periodically inspect the tire treads and remove stones, nails, glass or
other objects that may be wedged in the tread grooves. Check for holes
or cuts that may permit air leakage from the tire and make necessary
repairs.
Inspect the tire side walls for cuts, bruises and other damage. If internal
damage to the tire is suspected, have the tire demounted and inspected
in case it needs to be repaired or replaced.
Maintenance and Modifications
The suspension and steering systems on your vehicle have been designed
and tested to provide both reasonably safe, predictable performance
whether loaded or empty and durable load carrying capability. For this
reason, Ford strongly recommends that you do not make modifications
such as adding or removing parts (such as lift kits or stabilizer bars) or
by using replacement parts not equivalent to the original factory
equipment.
Any modifications to a vehicle that raise the center of gravity can make
it more likely the vehicle will roll over as a result of a loss of control.
Ford recommends that caution be used with any vehicle equipped with a
high load or device (such as ladder racks or pickup box cover).
Failure to maintain your vehicle properly may void the warranty, increase
your repair cost, reduce vehicle performance and operational capabilities
and adversely affect driver and passenger safety. Frequent inspection of
vehicle chassis components is recommended if the vehicle is subjected to
heavy off-road usage.
POWER TAKE OFF (PTO) CAPABILITY (IF EQUIPPED)
Some vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission and the 6.8L or
7.3L engine are also equipped with Power Take Off (PTO) capability.
These vehicles have a special transmission case, internal components and
calibration for PTO usage.

160
Driving
The PTO can be used during mobile and stationary
continuous/intermittent applications.
PTO operation is disabled while the vehicle is in Overdrive (the TCIL will
not be illuminated), in N (Neutral), during engine cranking. Transmission
upshift and downshift schedules will be reduced by about 15% and will
have a firmer shift feel during PTO mobile applications.
The PTO cannot be disabled while the transmission is in Manual 3
(Overdrive position with Overdrive canceled), Manual 2, Manual 1.
Refer to the Body Builders Layout Book for recommended electrical
installation.
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
Do not drive quickly through standing water, especially if the depth is
unknown. Traction or brake capability may be limited and if the ignition
system gets wet, your engine may stall. Water may also enter your
engines air intake and severely damage your engine.
If driving through deep or standing water is unavoidable, proceed very
slowly. Never drive through water that is higher than the bottom of the
hubs (for trucks) or the bottom of the wheel rims (for cars).
Once through the water, always try the brakes. Wet brakes do not stop
the vehicle as effectively as dry brakes. Drying can be improved by
moving your vehicle slowly while applying light pressure on the brake
pedal.
Driving through deep water where the transmission vent tube is
submerged may allow water into the transmission and cause
internal transmission damage.
VEHICLE LOADING
Before loading a vehicle, familiarize yourself with the following terms:
Base Curb Weight: Weight of the vehicle including any standard
equipment, fluids, lubricants, etc. It does not include occupants or
aftermarket equipment.
Payload: Combined maximum allowable weight of cargo, occupants
and optional equipment. The payload equals the gross vehicle weight
rating minus base curb weight.
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight): Base curb weight plus payload
weight. The GVW is not a limit or a specification.
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating): Maximum permissible total
weight of the base vehicle, occupants, optional equipment and cargo.

161
Driving
The GVWR is specific to each vehicle and is listed on the Safety
Certification Label on the drivers door pillar.
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating): Carrying capacity for each axle
system. The GAWR is specific to each vehicle and is listed on the
Safety Certification Label on the drivers door pillar.
GCW (Gross Combined Weight): The combined weight of the
towing vehicle (including occupants and cargo) and the loaded trailer.
GCWR (Gross Combined Weight Rating): Maximum permissible
combined weight of towing vehicle (including occupants and cargo)
and the loaded trailer
Maximum Trailer Weight Rating: Maximum weight of a trailer the
vehicle is permitted to tow. The maximum trailer weight rating is
determined by subtracting the vehicle curb weight for each
engine/transmission combination, any required option weight for trailer
towing and the weight of the driver from the GCWR for the towing
vehicle.
Maximum Trailer Weight: Maximum weight of a trailer the loaded
vehicle (including occupants and cargo) is permitted to tow. It is
determined by subtracting the weight of the loaded trailer towing
vehicle from the GCWR for the towing vehicle.
Trailer Weight Range: Specified weight range that the trailer must
fall within that ranges from zero to the maximum trailer weight rating.
Remember to figure in the tongue load of your loaded trailer when
figuring the total weight.
Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on the
certification label.

Do not use replacement tires with lower load carrying capacities than the
originals because they may lower the vehicles GVWR and GAWR
limitations. Replacement tires with a higher limit than the originals do
not increase the GVWR and GAWR limitations.
The Safety Certification Label, found on the drivers door pillar, lists
several important vehicle weight rating limitations. Before adding any
additional equipment, refer to these limitations. If you are adding weight
to the front of your vehicle, (potentially including weight added to the
cab), the weight added should not exceed the front axle reserve capacity
(FARC). Additional frontal weight may be added to the front axle reserve
capacity provided you limit your payload in other ways (i.e. restrict the
number of occupants or amount of cargo carried).

162
Driving
Always ensure that the weight of occupants, cargo and equipment being
carried is within the weight limitations that have been established for
your vehicle including both gross vehicle weight and front and rear gross
axle weight rating limits. Under no circumstance should these limitations
be exceeded.
Exceeding any vehicle weight rating limitation could result in
serious damage to the vehicle and/or personal injury.

Special loading instructions for owners of pickup trucks and


utility-type vehicles
For important information regarding safe operation of this type
of vehicle, see the Preparing to drive your vehicle section in
this chapter.

Loaded vehicles, with a higher center of gravity, may handle


differently than unloaded vehicles. Extra precautions, such as
slower speeds and increased stopping distance, should be taken when
driving a heavily loaded vehicle.

Your vehicle has the capability to haul more cargo and people than most
passenger cars. Depending upon the type and placement of the load,
hauling cargo and people may raise the center of gravity of the vehicle.

Calculating the load your vehicle can carry/tow


1. Use the appropriate maximum gross combined weight rating (GCWR)
chart (in the Trailer Towing section) to find the maximum GCWR for
your type engine and rear axle ratio.
2. Weigh your vehicle as you customarily operate the vehicle without
cargo. To obtain correct weights, try taking your vehicle to a shipping
company or an inspection station for trucks.
3. Subtract your loaded vehicle weight from the maximum GCWR on the
following charts. This is the maximum trailer weight your vehicle can tow
and must fall below the maximum shown under maximum trailer weight
on the chart.

163
Driving
TRAILER TOWING
Your vehicle may tow a
Conventional/Class IV trailer or fifth
wheel trailer provided the maximum
trailer weight is less than or equal to
the maximum trailer weight listed
for your engine and rear axle ratio
on the following charts.
2nd unit bodies are not included in
maximum trailer weight ratings.
Weight of additional body must be
subtracted from the maximum
trailer weight.

Your vehicles load capacity is designated by weight, not by volume, so


you cannot necessarily use all available space when loading a vehicle.
Towing a trailer places an additional load on your vehicles engine,
transmission, axle, brakes, tires and suspension. Inspect these
components carefully prior to and after any towing operation. The
following trailer towing charts apply to vehicles equipped with gasoline
engines; for Diesel engines, refer to the 7.3 Liter Power Stroke Direct
Injection Turbo Diesel Supplement.
Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on the
certification label.

Towing trailers beyond the maximum recommended gross trailer


weight could result in engine damage, transmission/axle damage,
structural damage, loss of control, and personal injury.

Refer to Transmission temperature gauge in the Instrument cluster


chapter for transmission fluid temperature information.

164
Driving

F-250/350 Regular Cab Single Rear Wheel 4x2 w/automatic


transmission
Engine Rear axle Maximum GCWR - Maximum
ratio kg (lbs.) trailer weight -
kg (lbs.)
5.4L 3.73 6123 (13500) 3629 (8000)
5.4L 4.10 6804 (15000) 4309 (9500)
6.8L 3.73 7711 (17000) 5171 (11400)
6.8L (w/out 4.30 9072 (20000) 5670 (12500)
fifth wheel)
6.8L (w/fifth 4.30 9072 (20000) 6350 (14000)
wheel)
F-250/350 Regular Cab Single Rear Wheel 4x2 w/manual
transmission
Engine Rear axle Maximum GCWR - Maximum
ratio kg (lbs.) trailer weight -
kg (lbs.)
5.4L 3.73 6123 (13500) 3629 (8000)
5.4L 4.10 6804 (15000) 4309 (9500)
6.8L (w/out 3.73 7484 (16500) 4536 (10000)
fifth wheel)
6.8L (w/fifth 3.73 7484 (16500) 4944 (10900)
wheel)
6.8L (w/out 4.30 9072 (20000) 5670 (12500)
fifth wheel)
6.8L (w/fifth 4.30 9072 (20000) 6532 (14400)
wheel)

165
Driving

F-250/350 Regular Cab Single Rear Wheel 4x4 w/automatic


transmission
Engine Rear axle Maximum GCWR - Maximum
ratio kg (lbs.) trailer weight -
kg (lbs.)
5.4L 3.73 6123 (13500) 3402 (7500)
5.4L 4.10 6804 (15000) 4082 (9000)
6.8L 3.73 7711 (17000) 4944 (10900)
6.8L (w/out 4.30 9072 (20000) 5670 (12500)
fifth wheel)
6.8L (w/fifth 4.30 9072 (20000) 6305 (13900)
wheel)
F-250/350 Regular Cab Single Rear Wheel 4x4 w/manual
transmission
Engine Rear axle Maximum GCWR - Maximum
ratio kg (lbs.) trailer weight -
kg (lbs.)
5.4L 3.73 6123 (13500) 3402 (7500)
5.4L 4.10 6804 (15000) 4082 (9000)
6.8L (w/out 3.73 7484 (16500) 4536 (10000)
fifth wheel)
6.8L (w/fifth 3.73 7484 (16500) 4717 (10400)
wheel)
6.8L (w/out 4.30 9072 (20000) 5670 (12500)
fifth wheel)
6.8L (w/fifth 4.30 9072 (20000) 6305 (13900)
wheel)

166
Driving

F-350 Regular Cab Dual Rear Wheel 4x2 w/automatic


transmission
Engine Rear axle Maximum GCWR - Maximum
ratio kg (lbs.) trailer weight -
kg (lbs.)
5.4L 3.73 6123 (13500) 3447 (7600)
5.4L 4.10 6804 (15000) 4128 (9100)
6.8L 3.73 7711 (17000) 4944 (10900)
6.8L (w/out 4.30 9072 (20000) 5670 (12500)
fifth wheel)
6.8L (w/fifth 4.30 9072 (20000) 6305 (13900)
wheel)
F-350 Regular Cab Dual Rear Wheel 4x2 w/manual transmission
Engine Rear axle Maximum GCWR - Maximum
ratio kg (lbs.) trailer weight -
kg (lbs.)
5.4L 3.73 6123 (13500) 3447 (7600)
5.4L 4.10 6804 (15000) 4128 (9100)
6.8L (w/out 3.73 7484 (16500) 4536 (10000)
fifth wheel)
6.8L (w/fifth 3.73 7484 (16500) 4717 (10400)
wheel)
6.8L (w/out 4.30 9072 (20000) 5670 (12500)
fifth wheel)
6.8L (w/fifth 4.30 9072 (20000) 6305 (13900)
wheel)

167
Driving

F-350 Regular Cab Dual Rear Wheel 4x4 w/automatic


transmission
Engine Rear axle Maximum GCWR - Maximum
ratio kg (lbs.) trailer weight -
kg (lbs.)
5.4L 3.73 6123 (13500) 3266 (7200)
5.4L 4.10 6804 (15000) 3946 (8700)
6.8L 3.73 7711 (17000) 4763 (10500)
6.8L (w/out 4.30 9072 (20000) 5670 (12500)
fifth wheel)
6.8L (w/fifth 4.30 9072 (20000) 6123 (13500)
wheel)
F-350 Regular Cab Dual Rear Wheel 4x4 w/manual transmission
Engine Rear axle Maximum GCWR - Maximum
ratio kg (lbs.) trailer weight -
kg (lbs.)
5.4L 3.73 6123 (13500) 3266 (7200)
5.4L 4.10 6804 (15000) 3946 (8700)
6.8L 3.73 7484 (16500) 4536 (10000)
6.8L (w/out 4.30 9072 (20000) 5670 (12500)
fifth wheel)
6.8L (w/fifth 4.30 9072 (20000) 6123 (13500)
wheel)

168
Driving

F-250/350 SuperCab Single Rear Wheel 4x2 w/automatic


transmission
Engine Rear axle Maximum GCWR - Maximum
ratio kg (lbs.) trailer weight -
kg (lbs.)
5.4L 3.73 6123 (13500) 3493 (7700)
5.4L 4.10 6804 (15000) 4173 (9200)
6.8L 3.73 7711 (17000) 5035 (11100)
6.8L (w/out 4.30 9072 (20000) 5670 (12500)
fifth wheel)
6.8L (w/fifth 4.30 9072 (20000) 6396 (14100)
wheel)
F-250/350 SuperCab Single Rear Wheel 4x2 w/manual
transmission
Engine Rear axle Maximum GCWR - Maximum
ratio kg (lbs.) trailer weight -
kg (lbs.)
5.4L 3.73 6123 (13500) 3538 (7800)
5.4L 4.10 6804 (15000) 4218 (9300)
6.8L (w/out 3.73 7484 (16500) 4536 (10000)
fifth wheel)
6.8L (w/fifth 3.73 7484 (16500) 4808 (10600)
wheel)
6.8L (w/out 4.30 9072 (20000) 5670 (12500)
fifth wheel)
6.8L (w/fifth 4.30 9072 (20000) 6396 (14100)
wheel)

169
Driving

F-250/350 SuperCab Single Rear Wheel 4x4 w/automatic


transmission
Engine Rear axle Maximum GCWR - Maximum
ratio kg (lbs.) trailer weight -
kg (lbs.)
5.4L (w/out 3.73 6123 (13500) 3311 (7300)
fifth wheel)
5.4L (w/fifth 3.73 6123 (13500) 3357 (7400)
wheel)
5.4L (w/out 4.10 6804 (15000) 3992 (8800)
fifth wheel)
5.4L (w/fifth 4.10 6804 (15000) 4037 (8900)
wheel)
6.8L 3.73 7711 (17000) 4853 (10700)
6.8L (w/out 4.30 9072 (20000) 5670 (12500)
fifth wheel)
6.8L (w/fifth 4.30 9072 (20000) 6214 (13700)
wheel)
F-250/350 SuperCab Single Rear Wheel 4x4 w/manual
transmission
Engine Rear axle Maximum GCWR - Maximum
ratio kg (lbs.) trailer weight -
kg (lbs.)
5.4L 3.73 6123 (13500) 3357 (7400)
5.4L 4.10 6804 (15000) 4037 (8900)
6.8L (w/out 3.73 7484 (16500) 4536 (10000)
fifth wheel)
6.8L (w/fifth 3.73 7484 (16500) 4672 (10300)
wheel)
6.8L (w/out 4.30 9072 (20000) 5670 (12500)
fifth wheel)
6.8L (w/fifth 4.30 9072 (20000) 6260 (13800)
wheel)

170
Driving

F-350 SuperCab Dual Rear Wheel 4x2 w/automatic transmission


Engine Rear axle Maximum GCWR - Maximum
ratio kg (lbs.) trailer weight -
kg (lbs.)
5.4L 3.73 6123 (13500) 3266 (7200)
5.4L 4.10 6804 (15000) 3946 (8700)
6.8L 3.73 7711 (17000) 4763 (10500)
6.8L (w/out 4.30 9072 (20000) 5670 (12500)
fifth wheel)
6.8L (w/fifth 4.30 9072 (20000) 6123 (13500)
wheel)
F-350 SuperCab Dual Rear Wheel 4x2 w/manual transmission
Engine Rear axle Maximum GCWR - Maximum
ratio kg (lbs.) trailer weight -
kg (lbs.)
5.4L 3.73 6123 (13500) 3311 (7300)
5.4L 4.10 6804 (15000) 3992 (8800)
6.8L (w/out 3.73 7484 (16500) 4536 (10000)
fifth wheel)
6.8L (w/fifth 3.73 7484 (16500) 4581 (10100)
wheel)
6.8L (w/out 4.30 9072 (20000) 5670 (12500)
fifth wheel)
6.8L (w/fifth 4.30 9072 (20000) 6169 (13600)
wheel)

171
Driving

F-350 SuperCab Dual Rear Wheel 4x4 w/automatic transmission


Engine Rear axle Maximum GCWR - Maximum
ratio kg (lbs.) trailer weight -
kg (lbs.)
5.4L 3.73 6123 (13500) 3130 (6900)
5.4L 4.10 6804 (15000) 3810 (8400)
6.8L 3.73 7711 (17000) 4627 (10200)
6.8L (w/out 4.30 9072 (20000) 5670 (12500)
fifth wheel)
6.8L (w/fifth 4.30 9072 (20000) 5987 (13200)
wheel)
F-350 SuperCab Dual Rear Wheel 4x4 w/manual transmission
Engine Rear axle Maximum GCWR - Maximum
ratio kg (lbs.) trailer weight -
kg (lbs.)
5.4L 3.73 6123 (13500) 3130 (6900)
5.4L 4.10 6804 (15000) 3810 (8400)
6.8L 3.73 7484 (16500) 4400 (9700)
6.8L (w/out 4.30 9072 (20000) 5670 (12500)
fifth wheel)
6.8L (w/fifth 4.30 9072 (20000) 5987 (13200)
wheel)
F-250/350 Crew Cab Single Rear Wheel 4x2 w/automatic
transmission
Engine Rear axle Maximum GCWR - Maximum
ratio kg (lbs.) trailer weight -
kg (lbs.)
5.4L 3.73 6123 (13500) 3402 (7500)
5.4L 4.10 6804 (15000) 4082 (9000)
6.8L 3.73 7711 (17000) 4944 (10900)
6.8L (w/out 4.30 9072 (20000) 5670 (12500)
fifth wheel)
6.8L (w/fifth 4.30 9072 (20000) 6305 (13900)
wheel)

172
Driving

F-250/350 Crew Cab Single Rear Wheel 4x2 w/manual


transmission
Engine Rear axle Maximum GCWR - Maximum
ratio kg (lbs.) trailer weight -
kg (lbs.)
5.4L 3.73 6123 (13500) 3402 (7500)
5.4L 4.10 6804 (15000) 4082 (9000)
6.8L (w/out 3.73 7484 (16500) 4536 (10000)
fifth wheel)
6.8L (w/fifth 3.73 7484 (16500) 4717 (10400)
wheel)
6.8L (w/out 4.30 9072 (20000) 5670 (12500)
fifth wheel)
6.8L (w/fifth 4.30 9072 (20000) 6305 (13900)
wheel)
F-250/350 Crew Cab Single Rear Wheel 4x4 w/automatic
transmission
Engine Rear axle Maximum GCWR - Maximum
ratio kg (lbs.) trailer weight -
kg (lbs.)
5.4L 3.73 6123 (13500) 3221 (7100)
5.4L 4.10 6804 (15000) 3901 (8600)
6.8L 3.73 7711 (17000) 4717 (10400)
6.8L (w/out 4.30 9072 (20000) 5670 (12500)
fifth wheel)
6.8L (w/fifth 4.30 9072 (20000) 6078 (13400)
wheel)

173
Driving

F-250/350 Crew Cab Single Rear Wheel 4x4 w/manual


transmission
Engine Rear axle Maximum GCWR - Maximum
ratio kg (lbs.) trailer weight -
kg (lbs.)
5.4L 3.73 6123 (13500) 3221 (7100)
5.4L 4.10 6804 (15000) 3901 (8600)
6.8L 3.73 7484 (16500) 4536 (10000)
6.8L (w/out 4.30 9072 (20000) 5670 (12500)
fifth wheel)
6.8L (w/fifth 4.30 9072 (20000) 6123 (13500)
wheel)
F-350 Crew Cab Dual Rear Wheel 4x2 w/automatic transmission
Engine Rear axle Maximum GCWR - Maximum
ratio kg (lbs.) trailer weight -
kg (lbs.)
5.4L 3.73 6123 (13500) 3266 (7200)
5.4L 4.10 6804 (15000) 3946 (8700)
6.8L 3.73 7711 (17000) 4763 (10500)
6.8L (w/out 4.30 9072 (20000) 5670 (12500)
fifth wheel)
6.8L (w/fifth 4.30 9072 (20000) 6123 (13500)
wheel)

174
Driving

F-350 Crew Cab Dual Rear Wheel 4x2 w/manual transmission


Engine Rear axle Maximum GCWR - Maximum
ratio kg (lbs.) trailer weight -
kg (lbs.)
5.4L 3.73 6123 (13500) 3266 (7200)
5.4L 4.10 6804 (15000) 3946 (8700)
6.8L (w/out 3.73 7484 (16500) 4536 (10000)
fifth wheel)
6.8L (w/fifth 3.73 7484 (16500) 4581 (10100)
wheel)
6.8L (w/out 4.30 9072 (20000) 5670 (12500)
fifth wheel)
6.8L (w/fifth 4.30 9072 (20000) 6169 (13600)
wheel)
F-350 Crew Cab Dual Rear Wheel 4x4 w/automatic transmission
Engine Rear axle Maximum GCWR - Maximum
ratio kg (lbs.) trailer weight -
kg (lbs.)
5.4L 3.73 6123 (13500) 3084 (6800)
5.4L 4.10 6804 (15000) 3765 (8300)
6.8L 3.73 7711 (17000) 4627 (10200)
6.8L (w/out 4.30 9072 (20000) 5670 (12500)
fifth wheel)
6.8L (w/fifth 4.30 9072 (20000) 5987 (13200)
wheel)

175
Driving

F-350 Crew Cab Dual Rear Wheel 4x4 w/manual transmission


Engine Rear axle Maximum GCWR - Maximum
ratio kg (lbs.) trailer weight -
kg (lbs.)
5.4L 3.73 6123 (13500) 3130 (6900)
5.4L 4.10 6804 (15000) 3810 (8400)
6.8L 3.73 7484 (16500) 4400 (9700)
6.8L (w/out 4.30 9072 (20000) 5670 (12500)
fifth wheel)
6.8L (w/fifth 4.30 9072 (20000) 5987 (13200)
wheel)
F-350 Regular Chassis Cab Single Rear Wheel 4x2 w/automatic
transmission (fifth wheel towing)
Engine Rear axle Maximum GCWR - Maximum
ratio kg (lbs.) trailer weight -
kg (lbs.)
5.4L 3.73 6123 (13500) 3311 (7300)
5.4L 4.10 6804 (15000) 3992 (8800)
6.8L 3.73 7711 (17000) 4808 (10600)
F-350 Regular Chassis Cab Single Rear Wheel 4x2 w/manual
transmission (fifth wheel towing)
Engine Rear axle Maximum GCWR - Maximum
ratio kg (lbs.) trailer weight -
kg (lbs.)
5.4L 3.73 6123 (13500) 3311 (7300)
5.4L 4.10 6804 (15000) 3992 (8800)
6.8L 3.73 7484 (16500) 4581 (10100)

176
Driving

F-350 Regular Chassis Cab Single Rear Wheel 4x4 w/automatic


transmission (fifth wheel towing)
Engine Rear axle Maximum GCWR - Maximum
ratio kg (lbs.) trailer weight -
kg (lbs.)
5.4L 3.73 6123 (13500) 3084 (6800)
5.4L 4.10 6804 (15000) 3765 (8300)
6.8L 3.73 7711 (17000) 4627 (10200)
F-350 Regular Chassis Cab Single Rear Wheel 4x4 w/manual
transmission (fifth wheel towing)
Engine Rear axle Maximum GCWR - Maximum
ratio kg (lbs.) trailer weight -
kg (lbs.)
5.4L 3.73 6123 (13500) 3130 (6900)
5.4L 4.10 6804 (15000) 3810 (8400)
6.8L 3.73 7484 (16500) 4400 (9700)
F-350 Regular Chassis Cab Dual Rear Wheel 4x2 w/automatic
transmission (fifth wheel towing)
Engine Rear axle Maximum GCWR - Maximum
ratio kg (lbs.) trailer weight -
kg (lbs.)
5.4L 3.73 6123 (13500) 3175 (7000)
5.4L 4.10 6804 (15000) 3856 (8500)
6.8L 3.73 7711 (17000) 4672 (10300)
6.8L 4.30 9072 (20000) 6033 (13300)

177
Driving

F-350 Regular Chassis Cab Dual Rear Wheel 4x2 w/manual


transmission (fifth wheel towing)
Engine Rear axle Maximum GCWR - Maximum
ratio kg (lbs.) trailer weight -
kg (lbs.)
5.4L 3.73 6123 (13500) 3175 (7000)
5.4L 4.10 6804 (15000) 3856 (8500)
6.8L 3.73 7484 (16500) 4445 (9800)
6.8L 4.30 9072 (20000) 6033 (13300)
F-350 Regular Chassis Cab Dual Rear Wheel 4x4 w/automatic
transmission (fifth wheel towing)
Engine Rear axle Maximum GCWR - Maximum
ratio kg (lbs.) trailer weight -
kg (lbs.)
5.4L 3.73 6123 (13500) 2948 (6500)
5.4L 4.10 6804 (15000) 3629 (8000)
6.8L 3.73 7711 (17000) 4445 (9800)
6.8L 4.30 9072 (20000) 5806 (12800)
F-350 Regular Chassis Cab Dual Rear Wheel 4x4 w/manual
transmission (fifth wheel towing)
Engine Rear axle Maximum GCWR - Maximum
ratio kg (lbs.) trailer weight -
kg (lbs.)
5.4L 3.73 6123 (13500) 2948 (6500)
5.4L 4.10 6804 (15000) 3629 (8000)
6.8L 3.73 7484 (16500) 4218 (9300)
6.8L 4.30 9072 (20000) 5806 (12800)
eb

178
Driving

F-450 Regular Chassis Cab Dual Rear Wheel 4x2 w/automatic


transmission (fifth wheel towing)
Engine Rear axle Maximum GCWR - Maximum
ratio kg (lbs.) trailer weight -
kg (lbs.)
6.8L 4.88 10886 (24000) 7530 (16600)
6.8L 5.38 11793 (26000) 8437 (18600)
F-450 Regular Chassis Cab Dual Rear Wheel 4x2 w/manual
transmission (fifth wheel towing)
Engine Rear axle Maximum GCWR - Maximum
ratio kg (lbs.) trailer weight -
kg (lbs.)
6.8L 4.88/5.38 9979 (22000) 6622 (14600)
F-450 Regular Chassis Cab Dual Rear Wheel 4x4 w/automatic
transmission (fifth wheel towing)
Engine Rear axle Maximum GCWR - Maximum
ratio kg (lbs.) trailer weight -
kg (lbs.)
6.8L 4.88 10886 (24000) 7394 (16300)
6.8L 5.38 11793 (26000) 8301 (18300)
F-450 Regular Chassis Cab Dual Rear Wheel 4x4 w/manual
transmission (fifth wheel towing)
Engine Rear axle Maximum GCWR - Maximum
ratio kg (lbs.) trailer weight -
kg (lbs.)
6.8L 4.88/5.38 9979 (22000) 6486 (14300)

179
Driving

F-550 Regular Chassis Cab Dual Rear Wheel 4x2 w/automatic


transmission (fifth wheel towing)
Engine Rear axle Maximum GCWR - Maximum
ratio kg (lbs.) trailer weight -
kg (lbs.)
6.8L 4.88 10886 (24000) 7484 (16500)
6.8L 5.38 11793 (26000) 8391 (18500)
F-550 Regular Chassis Cab Dual Rear Wheel 4x4 w/automatic
transmission (fifth wheel towing)
Engine Rear axle Maximum GCWR - Maximum
ratio kg (lbs.) trailer weight -
kg (lbs.)
6.8L 4.88 10886 (24000) 7348 (16200)
6.8L 5.38 11793 (26000) 8255 (18200)
F-350 Super Chassis Cab Single Rear Wheel 4x2 w/automatic
transmission (fifth wheel towing)
Engine Rear axle Maximum GCWR - Maximum
ratio kg (lbs.) trailer weight -
kg (lbs.)
5.4L 3.73 6123 (13500) 3130 (6900)
5.4L 4.10 6804 (15000) 3810 (8400)
6.8L 3.73 7711 (17000) 4627 (10200)
F-350 Super Chassis Cab Single Rear Wheel 4x2 w/manual
transmission (fifth wheel towing)
Engine Rear axle Maximum GCWR - Maximum
ratio kg (lbs.) trailer weight -
kg (lbs.)
5.4L 3.73 6123 (13500) 3130 (6900)
5.4L 4.10 6804 (15000) 3810 (8400)
6.8L 3.73 7484 (16500) 4445 (9800)

180
Driving

F-350 Super Chassis Cab Single Rear Wheel 4x4 w/automatic


transmission (fifth wheel towing)
Engine Rear axle Maximum GCWR - Maximum
ratio kg (lbs.) trailer weight -
kg (lbs.)
5.4L 3.73 6123 (13500) 2948 (6500)
5.4L 4.10 6804 (15000) 3629 (8000)
6.8L 3.73 7711 (17000) 4445 (9800)
F-350 Super Chassis Cab Single Rear Wheel 4x4 w/manual
transmission (fifth wheel towing)
Engine Rear axle Maximum GCWR - Maximum
ratio kg (lbs.) trailer weight -
kg (lbs.)
5.4L 3.73 6123 (13500) 2948 (6500)
5.4L 4.10 6804 (15000) 3629 (8000)
6.8L 3.73 7711 (17000) 4264 (9400)
F-350 Super Chassis Cab Dual Rear Wheel 4x2 w/automatic
transmission (fifth wheel towing)
Engine Rear axle Maximum GCWR - Maximum
ratio kg (lbs.) trailer weight -
kg (lbs.)
6.8L 3.73 7711 (17000) 4491 (9900)
6.8L 4.10 9072 (20000) 5851 (12900)
F-350 Super Chassis Cab Dual Rear Wheel 4x2 w/manual
transmission (fifth wheel towing)
Engine Rear axle Maximum GCWR - Maximum
ratio kg (lbs.) trailer weight -
kg (lbs.)
6.8L 3.73 7484 (16500) 4264 (9400)
6.8L 4.10 9072 (20000) 5851 (12900)

181
Driving

F-350 Super Chassis Cab Dual Rear Wheel 4x4 w/automatic


transmission (fifth wheel towing)
Engine Rear axle Maximum GCWR - Maximum
ratio kg (lbs.) trailer weight -
kg (lbs.)
6.8L 3.73 7711 (17000) 4309 (9500)
6.8L 4.10 9072 (20000) 5670 (12500)
F-350 Super Chassis Cab Dual Rear Wheel 4x4 w/manual
transmission (fifth wheel towing)
Engine Rear axle Maximum GCWR - Maximum
ratio kg (lbs.) trailer weight -
kg (lbs.)
6.8L 3.73 7484 (16500) 4082 (9000)
6.8L 4.10 9072 (20000) 5670 (12500)
F-450 Super Chassis Cab Dual Rear Wheel 4x2 w/automatic
transmission (fifth wheel towing)
Engine Rear axle Maximum GCWR - Maximum
ratio kg (lbs.) trailer weight -
kg (lbs.)
6.8L 4.88 10886 (24000) 7348 (16200)
6.8L 5.38 11793 (26000) 8255 (18200)
F-450 Super Chassis Cab Dual Rear Wheel 4x2 w/manual
transmission (fifth wheel towing)
Engine Rear axle Maximum GCWR - Maximum
ratio kg (lbs.) trailer weight -
kg (lbs.)
6.8L 4.88/5.38 9979 (22000) 6486 (14300)

182
Driving

F-450 Super Chassis Cab Dual Rear Wheel 4x4 w/automatic


transmission (fifth wheel towing)
Engine Rear axle Maximum GCWR - Maximum
ratio kg (lbs.) trailer weight -
kg (lbs.)
6.8L 4.88 10886 (24000) 7167 (15800)
6.8L 5.38 11793 (26000) 8074 (17800)
F-450 Super Chassis Cab Dual Rear Wheel 4x4 w/manual
transmission (fifth wheel towing)
Engine Rear axle Maximum GCWR - Maximum
ratio kg (lbs.) trailer weight -
kg (lbs.)
6.8L 4.88/5.38 9979 (22000) 6305 (13900)
F-550 Super Chassis Cab Dual Rear Wheel 4x2 w/automatic
transmission (fifth wheel towing)
Engine Rear axle Maximum GCWR - Maximum
ratio kg (lbs.) trailer weight -
kg (lbs.)
6.8L 4.88 10886 (24000) 7348 (16200)
6.8L 5.38 11793 (26000) 8255 (18200)
F-550 Super Chassis Cab Dual Rear Wheel 4x4 w/automatic
transmission (fifth wheel towing)
Engine Rear axle Maximum GCWR - Maximum
ratio kg (lbs.) trailer weight -
kg (lbs.)
6.8L 4.88 10886 (24000) 7121 (15700)
6.8L 5.38 11793 (26000) 8029 (17700)

183
Driving

F-350 Crew Chassis Cab Single Rear Wheel 4x2 w/automatic


transmission (fifth wheel towing)
Engine Rear axle Maximum GCWR - Maximum
ratio kg (lbs.) trailer weight -
kg (lbs.)
5.4L 3.73 6123 (13500) 3039 (6700)
5.4L 4.10 6804 (15000) 3719 (8200)
6.8L 3.73 7711 (17000) 4536 (10000)
F-350 Crew Chassis Cab Single Rear Wheel 4x2 w/manual
transmission (fifth wheel towing)
Engine Rear axle Maximum GCWR - Maximum
ratio kg (lbs.) trailer weight -
kg (lbs.)
5.4L 3.73 6123 (13500) 3039 (6700)
5.4L 4.10 6804 (15000) 3719 (8200)
6.8L 3.73 7484 (16500) 4354 (9600)
F-350 Crew Chassis Cab Single Rear Wheel 4x4 w/automatic
transmission (fifth wheel towing)
Engine Rear axle Maximum GCWR - Maximum
ratio kg (lbs.) trailer weight -
kg (lbs.)
5.4L 3.73 6123 (13500) 3084 (6800)
5.4L 4.10 6804 (15000) 3538 (7800)
6.8L 3.73 7711 (17000) 4354 (9600)
F-350 Crew Chassis Cab Single Rear Wheel 4x4 w/manual
transmission (fifth wheel towing)
Engine Rear axle Maximum GCWR - Maximum
ratio kg (lbs.) trailer weight -
kg (lbs.)
5.4L 3.73 6123 (13500) 2858 (6300)
5.4L 4.10 6804 (15000) 3538 (7800)
6.8L 3.73 7484 (16500) 4173 (9200)

184
Driving

F-350 Crew Chassis Cab Dual Rear Wheel 4x2 w/automatic


transmission (fifth wheel towing)
Engine Rear axle Maximum GCWR - Maximum
ratio kg (lbs.) trailer weight -
kg (lbs.)
6.8L 3.73 7711 (17000) 4400 (9700)
6.8L 4.30 9072 (20000) 5761 (12700)
F-350 Crew Chassis Cab Dual Rear Wheel 4x2 w/manual
transmission (fifth wheel towing)
Engine Rear axle Maximum GCWR - Maximum
ratio kg (lbs.) trailer weight -
kg (lbs.)
6.8L 3.73 7484 (16500) 4218 (9300)
6.8L 4.30 9072 (20000) 5806 (12800)
F-350 Crew Chassis Cab Dual Rear Wheel 4x4 w/automatic
transmission (fifth wheel towing)
Engine Rear axle Maximum GCWR - Maximum
ratio kg (lbs.) trailer weight -
kg (lbs.)
6.8L 3.73 7711 (17000) 4218 (9300)
6.8L 4.30 9072 (20000) 5579 (12300)
F-350 Crew Chassis Cab Dual Rear Wheel 4x4 w/manual
transmission (fifth wheel towing)
Engine Rear axle Maximum GCWR - Maximum
ratio kg (lbs.) trailer weight -
kg (lbs.)
6.8L 3.73 7484 (16500) 3992 (8800)
6.8L 4.30 9072 (20000) 5579 (12300)

185
Driving

F-450 Crew Chassis Cab Dual Rear Wheel 4x2 w/automatic


transmission (fifth wheel towing)
Engine Rear axle Maximum GCWR - Maximum
ratio kg (lbs.) trailer weight -
kg (lbs.)
6.8L 4.88 10886 (24000) 7257 (16000)
6.8L 5.38 11793 (26000) 8165 (18000)
F-450 Crew Chassis Cab Dual Rear Wheel 4x2 w/manual
transmission (fifth wheel towing)
Engine Rear axle Maximum GCWR - Maximum
ratio kg (lbs.) trailer weight -
kg (lbs.)
6.8L 4.88/5.38 9979 (22000) 6396 (14100)
F-450 Crew Chassis Cab Dual Rear Wheel 4x4 w/automatic
transmission (fifth wheel towing)
Engine Rear axle Maximum GCWR - Maximum
ratio kg (lbs.) trailer weight -
kg (lbs.)
6.8L 4.88/5.38 10886 (24000) 7121 (15700)
F-450 Crew Chassis Cab Dual Rear Wheel 4x4 w/manual
transmission (fifth wheel towing)
Engine Rear axle Maximum GCWR - Maximum
ratio kg (lbs.) trailer weight -
kg (lbs.)
6.8L 4.88/5.38 9979 (22000) 6214 (13700)
F-550 Crew Chassis Cab Dual Rear Wheel 4x2 w/automatic
transmission (fifth wheel towing)
Engine Rear axle Maximum GCWR - Maximum
ratio kg (lbs.) trailer weight -
kg (lbs.)
6.8L 4.88 10886 (24000) 7212 (15900)
6.8L 5.38 11793 (26000) 8119 (17900)

186
Driving

F-550 Crew Chassis Cab Dual Rear Wheel 4x4 w/automatic


transmission (fifth wheel towing)
Engine Rear axle Maximum GCWR - Maximum
ratio kg (lbs.) trailer weight -
kg (lbs.)
6.8L 4.88 10886 (24000) 7076 (15600)
6.8L 5.38 11793 (26000) 7983 (17600)
Preparing to tow
Use the proper equipment for towing a trailer, and make sure it is
properly attached to your vehicle. See your dealer or a reliable trailer
dealer if you require assistance.
Hitches
Do not use hitches that clamp onto the vehicles bumper or attach to the
axle. You must distribute the load in your trailer so that 10%15% of the
total weight of the trailer is on the tongue.
Load equalizing hitch
When hooking up a trailer using a load equalizing hitch, always use the
following procedure:
1. Park the unloaded vehicle on a level surface. With the ignition on and
all doors closed, allow the vehicle to stand for several minutes so that it
can level.
2. Measure the height of a reference point on the front and rear bumpers
at the center of the vehicle.
3. Attach the trailer to the vehicle and adjust the hitch equalizers so that
the front bumper height is within 013 mm (0.5 in) of the reference
point. After proper adjustment, the rear bumper should be no higher
than in Step 2.
Adjusting an equalizing hitch so the rear bumper of the vehicle
is higher than it was unloaded will defeat the function of the
load equalizing hitch and may cause unpredictable handling.

Safety chains
Always connect the trailers safety chains to the frame or hook retainers
of the vehicle hitch. To connect the trailers safety chains, cross the
chains under the trailer tongue and allow slack for turning corners.

187
Driving
If you use a rental trailer, follow the instructions that the rental agency
gives to you.
Do not attach safety chains to the bumper.
Trailer brakes
Electric brakes and manual, automatic or surge-type trailer brakes are
safe if installed properly and adjusted to the manufacturers
specifications. The trailer brakes must meet local and Federal
regulations.
Do not connect a trailers hydraulic brake system directly to your
vehicles brake system. Your vehicle may not have enough
braking power and your chances of having a collision greatly increase.

The braking system of the tow vehicle is rated for operation at the
GVWR not GCWR.
Trailer lamps
Trailer lamps are required on most towed vehicles. Make sure your
trailer lamps conform to local and Federal regulations. See your dealer or
trailer rental agency for proper instructions and equipment for hooking
up trailer lamps.
Using a step bumper (if equipped)
The rear bumper is equipped with an integral hitch and only requires a
ball with a 25.4 mm (one inch) shank diameter. The bumper has a 2 270
kg (5 000 lb.) trailer weight and 227 kg (500 lb.) tongue weight capacity.
If it is necessary to relocate the trailer hitch ball position, a
frame-mounted trailer hitch must be installed.
Driving while you tow
When towing a trailer:
Ensure that you turn off your speed control. The speed control may
shut off automatically when you are towing on long, steep grades.
Consult your local motor vehicle speed regulations for towing a trailer.
To eliminate excessive shifting, use a lower gear. This will also assist
in transmission cooling. (For additional information, refer to the
Driving with a 4speed automatic transmission section in this
chapter.
Anticipate stops and brake gradually.

188
Driving
Do not exceed the GCWR rating or transmission damage may occur.
Servicing after towing
If you tow a trailer for long distances, your vehicle will require more
frequent service intervals. Refer to your scheduled maintenance guide for
more information.
Trailer towing tips
Practice turning, stopping and backing up before starting on a trip to
get the feel of the vehicle trailer combination. When turning, make
wider turns so the trailer wheels will clear curbs and other obstacles.
Allow more distance for stopping with a trailer attached.
The trailer tongue weight should be no more than 1015% of the
loaded trailer weight.
After you have traveled 80 km (50 miles), thoroughly check your
hitch, electrical connections and trailer wheel lug nuts.
To aid in engine/transmission cooling and A/C efficiency during hot
weather while stopped in traffic, place the gearshift lever in P (Park)
(automatic transmission) or N (Neutral) (manual transmissions).
Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade. If you must
park on a grade, place wheel chocks under the trailers wheels.
Launching or retrieving a boat
When backing down a ramp during boat launching or retrieval,
Do not allow the static water level to rise above the bottom edge of
the rear bumper.
Do not allow waves to break higher than 15 cm (6 inches) above the
bottom edge of the rear bumper.
Disconnect the trailer tow electrical connector to prevent blown fuses
caused by water entering into your trailers electrical wiring.
Exceeding these limits may allow water to enter critical vehicle
components, adversely affecting driveability, emissions and reliability.
Replace front and rear axle lubricants any time the axles have been
submerged in water. Axle lubricant quantities are not to be checked
unless a leak is suspected.
ALL REAR WHEEL DRIVE (RWD) VEHICLES
This applies to all cars and 4x2 trucks/sport utilities with rear wheel
drive capability.

189
Driving
An example of recreational towing is towing your vehicle behind a
motorhome. The following recreational towing guidelines are designed to
ensure that your transmission is not damaged.
Place the transmission in N (Neutral).
Maximum speed is 56 km/h (35 mph).
Maximum distance is 80 km (50 miles).
If a distance of 80 km (50 miles) or a speed of 56 km/h (35 mph) must
be exceeded, you must disconnect the driveshaft. Ford recommends the
driveshaft be removed/installed only by a qualified technician. See your
local dealer for driveshaft removal/installation.
Improper removal/installation of the driveshaft can cause
transmission fluid loss, damage to the driveshaft and internal
transmission components.
RWD VEHICLES WITH 4X4 ELECTRONIC SHIFT TRANSFER CASE
OR ALL WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) VEHICLES WITH AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSIONS
Regarding recreational towing or having your vehicle towed, 4x4 vehicles
with electronic shift on the fly and AWD vehicles cannot be towed with
any wheels on the ground (with the exception of moving it as a disabled
vehicle off the road out of traffic).
SNOWPLOWING
Do not use your vehicle to plow until it has been driven at least 800 km
(500 miles).
For low speed snow removal, Ford offers a Snowplow Package Option on
select 4x4 vehicles. To assist Ford dealers and equipment installers
further prepare the vehicle for snowplowing, Ford includes instructions
in the Ford Truck Body Builders Layout Book and Ford Truck Source
Book. These instructions are available through your Ford dealer. They
include the list of vehicle models recommended for snowplowing and
snowplow weight limits. Use of the Snowplow Package Option, or its
equivalent, along with these instructions will help avoid possible
powertrain and chassis damage from snowplowing.
Ford does not install snowplows.
The Front and Rear Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR), Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR), Total Accessory Reserve Capacity (TARC) and
tire inflation pressures are found on the Safety Compliance Certification
Label located on the of the vehicles door jambs. This label is applied to

190
Driving
all vehicles completed by Ford Motor Company. Incomplete vehicles built
by Ford Motor Company will have an Incomplete Vehicle Label in place
of the Safety Compliance Label. The TARC does not apply to Incomplete
Vehicles and will not be shown on the Incomplete Vehicle Label.
The weight of the vehicle with occupants must never exceed the Front
and Rear GAWR or the GVWR.
The TARC is the weight of the permanently attached equipment that can
be added to the vehicle without violating the vehicles Safety Compliance
Certification. This includes the snowplow mounting hardware but does
not include the removable portion of the snowplow assembly.
Tires have their maximum inflation pressure and associated load rating
imprinted on the tire sidewall. This pressure may or may not be the
same as that shown as recommended on the vehicle. Tire inflation
pressure may be sufficient to carry the load of the vehicle as it is
operated. The vehicle operator may have to adjust the tire inflation
pressure to a value different than what is recommended on the vehicle
to accommodate the snowplow and payload. Consult your dealer or
equipment installer for help with proper tire air inflation pressures.
Adding or removing a snowplow may require adjustment to the front
wheel alignment and headlight aim. These specifications can be found in
the vehicles Workshop Manual. Proper wheel alignment is necessary for
optimum tire wear and vehicle handling.
Follow the severe duty schedule for engine oil and transmission fluid
change intervals.
Federal and some local regulations require additional exterior lamps for
snowplow-equipped vehicles. Consult your dealer for additional
information.
Installing the snowplow
Removing the blocker beam without installing snowplow
attachment hardware may affect air bag deployment in a crash.
Do not operate the truck unless either the blocker beam or snowplow
attachment hardware is installed on the vehicle.

Read the following instructions before installing a snowplow:


Front GAWR must not exceed 63% of the GVW. Add ballast weight to
the back of the vehicle, if necessary. Refer to the Safety Compliance
Certification Label to find Front GAWR.
The Front Axle Accessory Reserve Capacity and the Total Accessory
Reserve Capacity listed on the bottom right of the Safety Compliance

191
Driving
Certification Label will determine whether or not the addition of a
snowplow will overload your vehicle.
The weight of the snowplow and supporting components distributed to
the front axle must not exceed the front accessory reserve capacity.
The total weight of the snowplow and aftermarket equipment must
not exceed the Total Accessory Reserve Capacity.
The weight of the installed snowplow and aftermarket equipment must
not load the vehicle beyond the GAWR (front/rear) and GVWR listed
on the Safety Compliance Certification Label.
The total weight of the snowplow and aftermarket equipment must be
considered part of the payload and must not exceed the Gross
Combined Weight Rating (GCWR) for towing.
Federal and most local regulations require additional exterior lamps
for snowplow-equipped vehicles. Consult your dealer for additional
information.
After installing a snowplow to the vehicle, ensure the vehicles front
toe alignment and front ride height are within specification (reset if
required). These specifications are located in the vehicles Workshop
Manual. Adherence to the toe, tire pressures and ride height
specification is important for proper tire wear, ride, handling and
headlight aim. Also, maintain the engine oil and transmission fluid
change intervals following the severe duty schedule.
Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on the
certification label.

Removing snowplow
Read the following instructions before removing a snowplow:
After removing a snowplow from the vehicle, ensure the vehicles front
toe alignment and front ride height are within specification (reset if
required). These specifications are located in the vehicles Workshop
Manual. Adherence to the toe and ride height specification is
important for proper tire wear, ride, handling and headlight aim.

192
Driving
Snowplowing with your air bag equipped vehicle
Your vehicle is equipped with driver
and passenger air bag Supplemental
Restraint System (SRS). The SRS is
designed to activate when the
vehicle sustains sufficient
longitudinal deceleration.
Careless or high speed driving while plowing snow which results in
sufficient vehicle decelerations can deploy the air bag. Such driving also
increases the risk of accidents.
All occupants of the vehicle, including the driver, should always
properly wear their safety belts, even when an air bag (SRS) is
provided.

Never remove or defeat the tripping mechanisms designed into the


snow removal equipment by its manufacturer. Doing so may cause
damage to the vehicle and the snow removal equipment as well as
possible air bag deployment.
Additional equipment such as snowplow equipment may effect
the performance of the air bag sensors increasing the risk of
injury. Please refer to the Body Builders Layout Book for instructions
about the appropriate installation of additional equipment.

Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the Air Bag


Supplemental Restraint System or its fuses. See your Ford or
Lincoln Mercury dealer.

Engine temperature while plowing


When driving with a plow, your
engine may run at a higher
temperature than normal because H
the attached snowplow blade will
restrict airflow to the radiator.

C
193
Driving
If you are driving more than 24 km (15 miles) at temperatures above
freezing, angle the plow blade either full left or full right to provide
maximum airflow to the radiator.
If you are driving less than 24 km (15 miles) at speeds up to 64 km/h
(40 mph) in cold weather, you will not need to worry about blade
position to provide maximum airflow.
4WD operation while plowing
Shift transfer case to 4x4 LOW (4WD Low) when plowing in small
areas at speeds below 8 km/h (5 mph).
Shift transfer case to 4x4 HIGH (4WD High) when plowing larger
areas or light snow at higher speeds. Do not exceed 24 km/h (15
mph).
Do not shift the transmission from a forward gear to R (Reverse) until
the engine is at idle and the wheels are stopped.
If the vehicle is stuck, shift the transmission in a steady motion
between forward and reverse gears. Do not rock the vehicle for more
than a few minutes. The transmission and tires may be damaged or
the engine can overheat.
It is the owners responsibility to avoid engine overheating which
can cause damage.
Refer to Transmission temperature gauge in the Instrument cluster
chapter for transmission fluid temperature information.
Do not spin the wheels at over 35 mph (55 km/h). The tires may
fail and injure a passenger or bystander.

194
Roadside Emergencies
GETTING ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE
To fully assist you should you have a vehicle concern, Ford Motor
Company offers a complimentary roadside assistance program. This
program is separate from the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. The service
is available:
24hours, seven days a week
for the New Vehicle Limited Warranty period of three years or 60 000
km (36 000 miles), whichever occurs first on Ford and Mercury
vehicles, and four years or 80 000 km (50 000 miles) on Lincoln
vehicles.
Roadside assistance will cover:
changing a flat tire.
jump-starts.
lock-out assistance.
limited fuel delivery.
towing of your disabled vehicle to the nearest Ford Motor Company
dealership, or your selling dealer if within 56.3 km (35 miles) of the
nearest Ford Motor Company dealership (one tow per disablement).
Even non-warranty related tows, like accidents or getting stuck in the
mud or snow, are covered (some exclusions apply, such as impound
towing or repossession).
Canadian customers refer to your Owner Information Guide for
information on:
Coverage period
Exact fuel amounts
Towing of your disabled vehicle
Emergency travel expense reimbursement
Travel planning benefits
USING ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE
Complete the roadside assistance identification card and place it in your
wallet for quick reference. In the United States, this card is found in the
Owner Guide portfolio in the glove compartment in Ford vehicles and is
mailed to you if you own a Mercury or Lincoln. In Canada, the card is
found in the Owner Information Guide in the glove compartment.
U.S. Ford or Mercury vehicle customers who require roadside assistance,
call 18002413673; Lincoln vehicle customers call 18005214140.

195
Roadside Emergencies
Canadian customers who require roadside assistance, call
18006652006.
If you need to arrange roadside assistance for yourself, Ford Motor
Company will reimburse a reasonable amount. To obtain reimbursement
information, U.S. Ford or Mercury vehicles customers call
1-800-241-3673; Lincoln vehicle customers call 18005214140.
Canadian customers who need to obtain reimbursement information, call
18006652006.
ROADSIDE COVERAGE BEYOND BASIC WARRANTY
In the United States, you may purchase additional roadside assistance
coverage beyond this period through the Ford Auto Club by contacting
your Ford or Lincoln Mercury dealer.
Similarly in Canada, for uninterrupted Roadside Assistance coverage, you
may purchase extended coverage prior to your Basic Warrantys Roadside
Assistance expiring. For more information and enrollment, contact
18772942582 or visit our website at www.ford.ca.

HAZARD FLASHER
Use only in an emergency to warn traffic of vehicle breakdown,
approaching danger, etc. The hazard flashers can be operated when the
ignition is off.
The hazard lights control is
located on top of the steering
column.
Depress hazard lights control to
activate all hazard flashers
simultaneously.
Depress control again to turn the
flashers off.

FUEL
FUEL PUMP SHUT-OFF SWITCH RESET

The fuel pump shut-off switch is a device intended to stop the electric
fuel pump when your vehicle has been involved in a substantial jolt.
After a collision, if the engine cranks but does not start, the fuel pump
shut-off switch may have been activated.

196
Roadside Emergencies
The fuel pump shut-off switch is
located in the passengers foot well,
by the kick panel.

Use the following procedure to reset the fuel pump shut-off switch.
1. Turn the ignition to the OFF position.
2. Check the fuel system for leaks.
3. If no fuel leak is apparent, reset the fuel pump shut-off switch by
pushing in on the reset button.
4. Turn the ignition to the ON position. Pause for a few seconds and
return the key to the OFF position.
5. Make a further check for leaks in the fuel system.

197
Roadside Emergencies
FUSES AND RELAYS
Fuses
If electrical components in the
vehicle are not working, a fuse may
have blown. Blown fuses are
identified by a broken wire within
the fuse. Check the appropriate 15

fuses before replacing any electrical


components.
Note: Always replace a fuse with one that has the specified amperage
rating. Using a fuse with a higher amperage rating can cause severe wire
damage and could start a fire.
Standard fuse amperage rating and color
COLOR
Cartridge
Fuse Mini Standard Maxi Fuse link
maxi
rating fuses fuses fuses cartridge
fuses
2A Grey Grey
3A Violet Violet
4A Pink Pink
5A Tan Tan
7.5A Brown Brown
10A Red Red
15A Blue Blue
20A Yellow Yellow Yellow Blue Blue
25A Natural Natural
30A Green Green Green Pink Pink
40A Orange Green Green
50A Red Red Red
60A Blue Yellow
70A Tan Brown
80A Natural Black

198
Roadside Emergencies
Passenger compartment fuse panel / power distribution box
The fuse panel is located below and to the left of the steering wheel by
the brake pedal. Remove the panel cover to access the fuses.
To remove the fuse panel cover,
turn the panel fasteners
counterclockwise.

To remove a fuse use the fuse puller


tool provided on the fuse panel
cover.

199
Roadside Emergencies
The fuses are coded as follows.
Fuse/Relay Fuse Amp Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel
Location Rating Description
1 15A* Adjustable pedals
2 20A* Power point - floor console
3 20A* Power point 3rd row
4 20A* Power point - instrument panel
5 20A* Power point - right rear quarter
6 20A* Trailer tow turn/stop relay
7 30A* High beam headlamps / Flash to pass
8 Not used
9 20A* Heated mirrors
10 10A* A/C clutch
11 20A* Radio (main)
12 20A* Cigar lighter / OBD II
13 5A* Power mirrors/switches
14 15A* Daytime running lamps
15 10A* Drivers seat module memory
16 15A* Rear seat controller
17 15A* Exterior lamps
18 20A* Turn lamps/Brake on-off switch (high)
19 10A* Body security module/4x4 module
20 Not used
21 25A* Rear wiper motor
22 20A* Engine control
23 20A* Engine control
24 15A* Air suspension
25 10A* 4-Wheel Anti-Lock Brake System (4WABS)
module
26 10A* Airbags
27 15A* Ignition switch Run feed
28 10A* EATC module module/Front blower relay
coil

200
Roadside Emergencies

Fuse/Relay Fuse Amp Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel


Location Rating Description
29 10A* Customer access
30 15A* Highbeam headlamps
31 15A* Clutch interlock switch
32 5A* Radio (start)
33 15A* Front wiper
34 10A* Brake on-off switch
35 10A* Instrument cluster
36 10A* PCM Keep-Alive
37 15A* Horn
38 20A* Trailer tow park lamps and backup lamps
39 Not used
40 20A* Fuel pump
41 10A* Instrument cluster
42 15A* Delayed accessory
43 10A* Fog lamps
44 10A* PATS module, transceiver
45 10A* Ignition switch Run/ Start feed
46 10A* Left-hand lowbeam
47 10A* Right-hand lowbeam
48 10A* Rear wiper motor
101 30A** Trailer tow electric brake
102 30A** Door locks/Body security module
103 50A** Ignition switch
104 40A** Heated backlite
105 30A** Injector driver module
106 30A** Front wiper main
107 40A** Front blower motor
108 40A** Auxiliary blower motor
109 30A** Heated seats
110 50A** Ignition switch
111 30A** 4WD/Shift on the fly

201
Roadside Emergencies

Fuse/Relay Fuse Amp Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel


Location Rating Description
112 30A** Left-hand power seats
113 30A** Starter motor
114 30A** Right-hand power seats
115 20A** Trailer tow battery charge
116 30A** Ignition switch
601 30A CB Door window motors
602 60A** 4-Wheel Anti-Lock Brake System (4WABS)
module
210 Not used
211 Not used
212 Not used
301 Front blower motor relay
302 Powertrain (EEC) relay
303 Injector driver module relay (Diesel only)
304 Heated backlite relay
305 Trailer tow battery charge relay
306 Delayed accessory relay
307 Starter relay
* Mini Fuses ** Maxi Fuses
CHANGING THE TIRES
If you get a flat tire while driving, do not apply the brake heavily.
Instead, gradually decrease your speed. Hold the steering wheel firmly
and slowly move to a safe place on the side of the road.
The use of tire sealants is not recommended and may compromise the
integrity of your tires. The use of tire sealants may also affect your tire
pressure monitoring system (if equipped).
Spare tire information
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire that can be used as
either a spare or a regular tire. The spare tire is not equipped with wheel
trim. The wheel trim from the original wheel/tire may be used on the
spare.
If your vehicle is equipped with 4WD, a spare tire of a different
size than the road tires should not be used. Such a tire could
result in damage to driveline components and make the vehicle
difficult to control.

202
Roadside Emergencies
Location of the spare tire and tools
The spare tire and tools for your vehicle are stowed in the following
locations:
Tool Location
Spare tire (pick-up trucks only) Under the vehicle, just forward of
the rear bumper
Jack Regular cab, crew cab and
SuperCab without rear bench seat:
Fastened to floor pan behind
rearmost seat on passenger side
SuperCab with rear bench seat:
Under rear bench on passenger
side
Jack handle and lug wrench On top of the radiator support at
the front of the engine
compartment
Key, spare tire lock (if equipped) In the glove box
Removing the spare tire (with spare tire carrier only)
1. The following tools are required to remove the spare tire:
one handle extension and one
typical extension. To assemble,
align button with hole and slide
parts together. To disconnect,
depress button and pull apart.
one wheel nut wrench. Slide over
square end of jack handle.

203
Roadside Emergencies

2. If equipped, unlock and remove the spare tire lock from the rear
bumper drive tube using the the spare tire lock key and the jack handle.
3. Insert the hooked end of the jack
handle into the rear bumper drive
tube.
The handle will stop moving and
you will feel forward resistance to
turning when properly engaged.
4. Turn the handle counterclockwise
and lower the spare until you can
slide the tire rearward and the cable
is slack.
5. Remove the retainer through the center of the wheel.
Stowing the spare tire
1. Lay the tire on the ground with the valve stem facing up.
2. Slide the wheel under the vehicle
and install the retainer through the
wheel center.
3. Turn the jack handle clockwise
until the tire is raised to its original
position underneath the vehicle. The
effort to turn the jack handle
increases significantly and the spare
tire carrier ratchets when the tire is
raised to the stowed position. The spare tire carrier has a built-in ratchet
feature that will not allow you to overtighten.
4. Check that the tire lies flat to the frame assembly. Push against the
tire to make sure it is tightly seated under the vehicle. Loosen or
retighten if necessary.

204
Roadside Emergencies
5. If removed, install the spare tire lock into the bumper drive tube with
the spare tire lock key and jack handle.

Tire change procedure


1. Park on a level surface, activate
hazard flashers and set the parking
brake.
Automatic transmission: Place
gearshift lever in P (Park).
Manual transmission: Place
gearshift lever in R (Reverse).
Electronic Shift On the Fly four
wheel drive: Place transfer case
in 2WD, 4x4 HIGH or 4x4 LOW.
Manual shift transfer case four
wheel drive: Place transfer case
in 2H, 4H or 4L.

To prevent the vehicle from


moving when you change a
tire, be sure the parking brake is
set, then block (in both
directions) the wheel that is
diagonally opposite (other side
and end of the vehicle) to the tire
being changed.

2. Turn engine OFF and block the diagonally opposite wheel (block not
provided).
3. Remove the jack, jack handle, lug wrench and spare tire from the
stowage locations.
4. Use the tip of the lug wrench to remove any wheel trim.

205
Roadside Emergencies
5. Loosen each wheel lug nut
one-half turn counterclockwise but
do not remove them until the wheel
is raised off the ground.

When one of the rear wheels is off the ground, the transmission
alone will not prevent the vehicle from moving or slipping off the
jack, even if the transmission is in P (Park) (automatic transmission)
or R (Reverse) (manual transmission). To prevent the vehicle from
moving when you change the tire, be sure that the parking brake is set
and the diagonally opposite wheel is blocked.

If the vehicle slips off the jack, you or someone else could be
seriously injured.

The following steps apply to F250/F350 only:


6. Insert the hooked end of the jack
handle into the jack and use the
handle to slide the jack under the
vehicle.
7. Position the jack according to the
following guides:

206
Roadside Emergencies
Front (4x2)

Front passenger side (4x4)

207
Roadside Emergencies
Front driver side (4x4)
Make sure the jack fits into the
notched area next to the differential
housing.

Rear

Never use the front or rear


differential as a jacking point.
To lessen the risk of
personal injury, do not put
any part of your body under the
vehicle while changing a tire. Do
not start the engine when your
vehicle is on the jack. The jack is
only meant for changing the tire.

208
Roadside Emergencies
8. Turn the jack handle clockwise

until the wheel is completely off the ground and high enough to install
the spare tire.
9. Remove the lug nuts with the lug wrench.
10. On single rear wheel vehicles, replace the flat tire with the spare tire,
making sure the valve stem is facing outward for all front tires and
vehicles equipped with single rear wheels. If replacing an inboard rear
tire on a dual rear wheel vehicle, the valve stem must be facing outward.
If replacing the outboard wheel, the valve stem must be facing inward.
Reinstall the lug nuts until the wheel is snug against the hub. Do not
fully tighten the lug nuts until the wheel has been lowered.
11. Lower the wheel by turning the jack handle counterclockwise.
Go to step 19.
The following steps apply to F350 chassis Cab F450/F550 only:
12. Slide the notched end of the
jack handle over the release valve
and use the handle to slide the jack
under the vehicle. Make sure the
valve is closed by turning it
clockwise.
13. Position the jack according to
the following guides:

209
Roadside Emergencies
Front (4x2) F350

Front (4x2) F450/550

210
Roadside Emergencies
Front driver side (4x4)

Front passenger side (4x4)

211
Roadside Emergencies
Rear

14. Insert the jack handle into the


pump linkage.
15. Use an up-and-down motion
with the jack handle to raise the
wheel completely off the ground.
Hydraulic jacks are equipped
with a pressure release valve
that prevents lifting loads which
exceed the jacks rated capacity.
16. Remove the lug nuts with the
lug wrench.
17. Replace the flat tire with the
spare tire, making sure the valve stem is facing outward on all front an
inboard rear wheels. If replacing the outboard wheel, the valve stem
must be facing inward. Reinstall the lug nuts until the wheel is snug
against the hub. Do not fully tighten the lug nuts until the wheel has
been lowered.
18. Lower the wheel by slowly turning the release valve
counterclockwise.
Opening the release valve slowly will provide a more controlled
rate of descent.

212
Roadside Emergencies
The following steps apply to all vehicles:
19. Remove the jack and fully 1
tighten the lug nuts in the order
shown. 6 7
20. Stow the flat tire. Refer to
Stowing the spare tire if the 4 3
vehicle is equipped with a spare tire
carrier.
21. Stow the jack, jack handle and 8 5
lug wrench. Make sure the jack is 2
securely fastened so it does not
rattle when driving.
22. Unblock the wheels.
On vehicles equipped with dual rear wheels, retighten the wheel lug nuts
to the specified torque at 160 km (100 miles), and again at 800 km (500
miles) of new vehicle operation and after any wheel disturbance (tire
rotation, changing a flat tire, wheel removal, etc.).
On vehicles equipped with single rear wheels, retighten the lug nuts to
the specified torque at 800 km (500 miles) after any wheel disturbance
(tire rotation, changing a flat tire, wheel removal, etc.).
Bolt size Wheel lug nut torque*
Nm Lb-ft
M14 x 2.0 200-225 150-165
* Torque specifications are for nut and bolt threads free of dirt and
rust. All 2 piece flat wheel nuts, apply a light machine oil between the
flat washer and the nut. Use only Ford recommended replacement
fasteners.

JUMP STARTING YOUR VEHICLE


The gases around the battery can explode if exposed to flames,
sparks, or lit cigarettes. An explosion could result in injury or
vehicle damage.

Batteries contain sulfuric acid which can burn skin, eyes, and
clothing, if contacted.

213
Roadside Emergencies
Do not attempt to push-start your vehicle. Automatic
transmissions do not have push-start capability; also, the
catalytic converter may become damaged.

Preparing your vehicle


When the battery is disconnected or a new battery is installed, the
transmission must relearn its shift strategy. As a result, the transmission
may have firm and/or soft shifts. This operation is considered normal and
will not affect function or durability of the transmission. Over time, the
adaptive learning process will fully update transmission operation.
1. Use only a 12volt supply to start your vehicle.
2. Do not disconnect the battery of the disabled vehicle as this could
damage the vehicles electrical system.
3. Park the booster vehicle close to the hood of the disabled vehicle
making sure the two vehicles do not touch. Set the parking brake on
both vehicles and stay clear of the engine cooling fan and other moving
parts.
4. Check all battery terminals and remove any excessive corrosion before
you attach the battery cables. Ensure that vent caps are tight and level.
5. Turn the heater fan on in both vehicles to protect any electrical
surges. Turn all other accessories off.
Connecting the jumper cables

1. Connect the positive (+) booster cable to the positive (+) terminal of
the discharged battery.
Note: In the illustrations, lightning bolts are used to designate the
assisting (boosting) battery.

214
Roadside Emergencies

+
2. Connect the other end of the positive (+) cable to the positive (+)
terminal of the assisting battery.

3. Connect the negative (-) cable to the negative (-) terminal of the
assisting battery.

4. Make the final connection of the negative (-) cable to an exposed


metal part of the stalled vehicles engine, away from the battery and the
carburetor/fuel injection system. Do not use fuel lines, engine rocker
covers or the intake manifold as grounding points.

215
Roadside Emergencies

Do not connect the end of the second cable to the negative (-)
terminal of the battery to be jumped. A spark may cause an
explosion of the gases that surround the battery.

5. Ensure that the cables are clear of fan blades, belts, moving parts of
both engines, or any fuel delivery system parts.

Jump starting
1. Start the engine of the booster vehicle and run the engine at
moderately increased speed.
2. Start the engine of the disabled vehicle.
3. Once the disabled vehicle has been started, run both engines for an
additional three minutes before disconnecting the jumper cables.

Removing the jumper cables

Remove the jumper cables in the reverse order that they were
connected.
1. Remove the jumper cable from the ground metal surface.
Note: In the illustrations, lightning bolts are used to designate the
assisting (boosting) battery.

216
Roadside Emergencies

+
2. Remove the jumper cable on the negative (-) connection of the
booster vehicles battery.

3. Remove the jumper cable from the positive (+) terminal of the booster
vehicles battery.

4. Remove the jumper cable from the positive (+) terminal of the
disabled vehicles battery.
After the disabled vehicle has been started and the jumper cables
removed, allow it to idle for several minutes so the engine computer can
relearn its idle conditions.

217
Roadside Emergencies
WRECKER TOWING

If you need to have your vehicle towed, contact a professional towing


service or, if you are a member, your roadside assistance center.
On 4x2 vehicles, it is acceptable to tow the vehicle with the front wheels
on the ground and the rear wheels off the ground using a wheel lift or a
slingbelt with T-hooks.
On 4x4 vehicles, it is recommended that your vehicle be towed with a
wheel lift or flatbed equipment with all the wheels off the ground.
However, a slingbelt with T-hooks and a wheel dolly can also be used if
all four wheels are off the ground.

218
Roadside Emergencies
An alternative for towing a 4x4 vehicle is to:
put the transfer case in neutral. On manual 4WD systems, put the
4WD shift lever in N (Neutral); on electronic shift on the fly 4WD
systems, press the 2WD portion of the 4WD control.
unlock the front hub locks (refer to Four wheel drive [4WD]
Operation [if equipped] in the Driving chapter).
lift the rear wheels of the vehicle using a wheel lift or a sling belt with
T-hooks.
If the vehicle is towed by other means or incorrectly, vehicle
damage may occur.
Ford Motor Company provides a towing manual for all authorized tow
truck operators. Have your tow truck operator refer to this manual for
proper hook-up and towing procedures for your vehicle.

219
Customer Assistance
GETTING THE SERVICES YOU NEED
At home
Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada have authorized dealerships to
service your vehicle. It is preferred that you return to the Ford dealer
where your vehicle was purchased when warranty repairs are needed.
However, you may also take your vehicle to another Ford Motor
Company or Ford of Canada dealership authorized for warranty repairs.
Certain warranty repairs require special training though, so not all
dealers are authorized to perform all warranty repairs. That means that
depending on the warranty repair needed, the vehicle may need to be
taken to another dealer. If a particular dealership can not assist you,
then contact the Customer Relationship Center.
If you have questions or concerns, or are unsatisfied with the service you
are receiving, follow these steps:
1. Contact your Sales Representative or Service Advisor at your
selling/servicing dealership.
2. If your inquiry or concern remains unresolved, contact the Sales
Manager or Service Manager at the dealership.
3. If the inquiry or concern cannot be resolved at the dealership level,
please contact the Ford Customer Relationship Center.
Away from home
If you own a Ford or Mercury vehicle and are away from home when
your vehicle needs service, or if you need more help than the dealership
could provide, after following the steps described above, contact the
Ford Customer Relationship Center to find an authorized dealership to
help you.
In the United States:
Ford Motor Company
Customer Relationship Center
16800 Executive Plaza Drive
P.O. Box 6248
Dearborn, Michigan 48121
1-800-392-3673 (FORD)
(TDD for the hearing impaired: 1-800-232-5952)
www.ford.com

220
Customer Assistance
In Canada:
Customer Relationship Centre
Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited
P.O. Box 2000
Oakville, Ontario L6J 5E4
1-800-565-3673 (FORD)
www.ford.ca
If you own a Lincoln vehicle and are away from home when your vehicle
needs service, or if you need more help than the dealership could
provide, after following the steps described above, contact the Ford
Customer Relationship Center to find an authorized dealership to help
you.
In the United States:
Ford Motor Company
Customer Relationship Center
16800 Executive Plaza Drive
P.O. Box 6248
Dearborn, Michigan 48121
1-800-521-4140
(TDD for the hearing impaired: 1-800-232-5952)
www.ford.com
In Canada:
Customer Relationship Centre
Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited
P.O. Box 2000
Oakville, Ontario L6J 5E4
1-800-565-3673 (FORD)
www.ford.ca
In order to help you service your Ford or Lincoln Mercury vehicle, please
have the following information available when contacting a Customer
Relationship Center:
Your telephone number (home and business).
The name of the dealer and the city where the dealership is located.
The year and make of your vehicle.
The date of vehicle purchase.
The current odometer reading.
The vehicle identification number (VIN).
If you still have a complaint involving a warranty dispute, you may wish
to contact the Dispute Settlement Board (U.S.).

221
Customer Assistance
In some states (in the U.S.) you must directly notify Ford in writing
before pursuing remedies under your states warranty laws. Ford is also
allowed a final repair attempt in some states.
In the United States, a warranty dispute must be submitted to the
Dispute Settlement Board before taking action under the Magnuson-Moss
Warranty Act, or to the extent allowed by state law, before pursuing
replacement or repurchase remedies provided by certain state laws. This
dispute handling procedure is not required prior to enforcing state
created rights or other rights which are independent of the
Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act or state replacement or repurchase laws.
FORD EXTENDED SERVICE PLAN
You can get more protection for your new car or light truck by
purchasing Ford Extended Service Plan (Ford ESP) coverage. Ford ESP
is an optional service contract which is backed by Ford Motor Company
or Ford Motor Service Company (in the U.S.) and Ford of Canada (in
Canada). It provides the following:
Benefits during the warranty period depending on the plan you
purchase (such as: reimbursement for rentals; coverage for certain
maintenance and wear items).
Protection against covered repair costs after your Bumper-to-Bumper
Warranty expires.
You may purchase Ford ESP from any participating Ford and Lincoln
Mercury and Ford of Canada dealer. There are several plans available in
various time, distance and deductible combinations which can be tailored
to fit your own driving needs. Ford ESP also offers reimbursement
benefits for towing and rental coverage.
When you buy Ford ESP, you receive Peace-of-Mind protection
throughout the United States and Canada, provided by a network of
more than 5,000 participating Ford or Lincoln Mercury and Ford of
Canada dealers.
If you did not take advantage of the Ford Extended Service Plan at the
time of purchasing your vehicle, you may still be eligible. Please contact
your dealer for further information. Since this information is subject to
change, please ask your dealer for complete details about Ford Extended
Service Plan coverage options, or visit the Ford ESP website at
www.ford-esp.com.

222
Customer Assistance
THE DISPUTE SETTLEMENT BOARD (U.S. ONLY)
The Dispute Settlement Board is:
an independent, third-party arbitration program for warranty disputes.
available free to owners and lessees of qualifying Ford Motor Company
vehicles.
The Dispute Settlement Board may not be available in all states. Ford
Motor Company reserves the right to change eligibility limitations, modify
procedures and/or to discontinue this service without notice and without
incurring obligations per applicable state law.
What kinds of cases does the Board review?
Unresolved warranty repair concerns or vehicle performance concerns as
on Ford and Lincoln Mercury cars and Ford and Lincoln Mercury light
trucks which are within the terms of any applicable written new vehicle
warranty are eligible for review, except those involving:
a non-Ford product
a non-Ford dealership
sales disputes between customer and dealer except those associated
with warranty repairs or concerns with the vehicles performance as
designed
a request for reimbursement of consequential expenses unless a
service or product concern is being reviewed
items not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty (including
maintenance and wear items)
alleged personal injury/property damage claims
cases currently in litigation
vehicles not used primarily for family, personal or household purposes
(except in states where the Dispute Settlement Board is required to
review commercial vehicles)
vehicles with non-U.S. warranties
Concerns are ineligible for review if the New Vehicle Limited Warranty
has expired at receipt of your application and, in certain states eligibility
is dependent upon the customers possession of the vehicle.
Eligibility may differ according to state law. For example, see the unique
brochures for California, West Virginia, Georgia and Wisconsin
purchasers/lessees.

223
Customer Assistance
Board membership
The Board consists of:
Three consumer representatives
A Ford or Lincoln Mercury dealership representative
Consumer candidates for Board membership are recruited and trained by
an independent consulting firm. The dealership Board member is chosen
from Ford and Lincoln Mercury dealership management, recognized for
their business leadership qualities.
What the Board needs
To have your case reviewed you must complete the application in the
DSB brochure and mail it to the address provided on the application
form. Some states will require you to use certified mail, with return
receipt requested.
Your application is reviewed and, if it is determined to be eligible, you
will receive an acknowledgment indicating:
The file number assigned to your application.
The toll-free phone number of the DSBs independent administrator.
Your dealership and a Ford Motor Company representative will then be
asked to submit statements.
To properly review your case, the Board needs the following information:
Legible copies of all documents and maintenance or repair orders
relevant to the case.
The year, make, model, and Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) listed
on your vehicle ownership license.
The date of repair(s) and mileage at the time of occurrence(s).
The current mileage.
The name of the dealer(s) who sold or serviced the vehicle.
A brief description of your unresolved concern.
A brief summary of the action taken by the dealer(s) and Ford Motor
Company.
The names (if known) of all the people you contacted at the
dealership(s).
A description of the action you expect to resolve your concern.
You will receive a letter of explanation if your application does not
qualify for Board review.

224
Customer Assistance
Oral presentations
If you would like to make an oral presentation, indicate YES to question
6 on the application. While it is your right to make an oral presentation
before the Board, this is not a requirement and the Board will decide the
case whether or not an oral presentation is made. An oral presentation
may be requested by the Board as well.
Making a decision
Board members review all available information related to each
complaint, including oral presentations, and arrive at a fair and impartial
decision. Board review may be terminated at any time by either party.
Every effort is made to decide the case within 40 days of the date that
all requested information is received by the Board. Since the Board
generally meets once a month, it may take longer for the Board to
consider some cases.
After a case is reviewed, the Board mails you a decision letter and a
form on which to accept or reject the Boards decision. The decisions of
the Board are binding on Ford (and, in some cases, on the dealer) but
not on consumers who are free to pursue other remedies available to
them under state or federal law.
To request a DSB Brochure/Application
For a brochure/application, speak to your dealer or write/call to the
Board at the following address/phone number:
Dispute Settlement Board
P.O. Box 5120
Southfield, MI 480865120
18004283718
You may also contact the North American Customer Relationship Center
at 1-800-392-3673 (Ford), TDD for the hearing impaired: 1-800-232-5952
or by writing to the Center at the following address:
Ford Motor Company
Customer Relationship Center
16800 Executive Plaza Drive
P.O. Box 6248
Dearborn, Michigan 48121

225
Customer Assistance
UTILIZING THE MEDIATION/ARBITRATION PROGRAM
(CANADA ONLY)
In those cases where you continue to feel that the efforts by Ford and
the dealer to resolve a factory-related vehicle service concern have been
unsatisfactory, Ford of Canada participates in an impartial third party
mediation/arbitration program administered by the Canadian Motor
Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP).
The CAMVAP program is a straight-forward and relatively speedy
alternative to resolve a disagreement when all other efforts to produce a
settlement have failed. This procedure is without cost to you and is
designed to eliminate the need for lengthy and expensive legal
proceedings.
In the CAMVAP program, impartial third-party arbitrators conduct
hearings at mutually convenient times and places in an informal
environment. These impartial arbitrators review the positions of the
parties, make decisions and, when appropriate, render awards to resolve
disputes. CAMVAP decisions are fast, fair, and final; the arbitrators
award is binding both to you and Ford of Canada.
CAMVAP services are available in all territories and provinces. For more
information, without charge or obligation, call your CAMVAP Provincial
Administrator directly at 1-800-207-0685.
GETTING ASSISTANCE OUTSIDE THE U.S. AND CANADA
Before exporting your vehicle to a foreign country, contact the
appropriate foreign embassy or consulate. These officials can inform you
of local vehicle registration regulations and where to find unleaded fuel.
If you cannot find unleaded fuel or can only get fuel with an anti-knock
index lower than is recommended for your vehicle, contact a district or
owner relations/customer relationship office.
The use of leaded fuel in your vehicle without proper conversion may
damage the effectiveness of your emission control system and may cause
engine knocking or serious engine damage. Ford Motor Company/Ford of
Canada is not responsible for any damage caused by use of improper
fuel.
In the United States, using leaded fuel may also result in difficulty
importing your vehicle back into the U.S.
If your vehicle must be serviced while you are traveling or living in
Central or South America, the Caribbean, or the Middle East, contact the
nearest Ford dealership. If the dealership cannot help you, write or call:

226
Customer Assistance
FORD MOTOR COMPANY
WORLDWIDE DIRECT MARKET OPERATIONS
1555 Fairlane Drive
Fairlane Business Park #3
Allen Park, Michigan 48101
U.S.A.
Telephone: (313) 594-4857
FAX: (313) 390-0804
If you are in another foreign country, contact the nearest Ford
dealership. If the dealership employees cannot help you, they can direct
you to the nearest Ford affiliate office.
If you buy your vehicle in North America and then relocate outside of the
U.S. or Canada, register your vehicle identification number (VIN) and new
address with Ford Motor Company Worldwide Direct Market Operations.
ORDERING ADDITIONAL OWNERS LITERATURE
To order the publications in this portfolio, contact Helm, Incorporated at:
HELM, INCORPORATED
P.O. Box 07150
Detroit, Michigan 48207
Or call:
For a free publication catalog, order toll free: 1-800-782-4356
Helm, incorporated can also be reached by their website:
www.helminc.com.
Monday-Friday 8:00 a.m. - 6:00 p.m. EST
(Items in this catalog may be purchased by credit card holders only.)
Obtaining a French owners guide
French Owners Guides can be obtained from your dealer or by writing to
Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited, Service Publications, P.O. Box
1580, Station B, Mississauga, Ontario L4Y 4G3.
IN CALIFORNIA (U.S. ONLY)
California Civil Code Section 1793.2(d) requires that, if a manufacturer
or its representative is unable to repair a motor vehicle to conform to the
vehicles applicable express warranty after a reasonable number of
attempts, the manufacturer shall be required to either replace the
vehicle with one substantially identical or repurchase the vehicle and
reimburse the buyer in an amount equal to the actual price paid or

227
Customer Assistance
payable by the consumer (less a reasonable allowance for consumer
use). The consumer has the right to choose whether to receive a refund
or replacement vehicle.
California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b) presumes that the manufacturer
has had a reasonable number of attempts to conform the vehicle to its
applicable express warranties if, within the first 18 months of ownership of
a new vehicle or the first 29 000 km (18 000 miles), whichever occurs
first:
1. Two or more repair attempts are made on the same nonconformity
likely to cause death or serious bodily injury OR
2. Four or more repair attempts are made on the same nonconformity (a
defect or condition that substantially impairs the use, value or safety of
the vehicle) OR
3. The vehicle is out of service for repair of nonconformities for a total of
more than 30 calendar days (not necessarily all at one time)
In the case of 1 or 2 above, the consumer must also notify the
manufacturer of the need for the repair of the nonconformity at the
following address:
Ford Motor Company
16800 Executive Plaza Drive
Mail Drop 3NE-B
Dearborn, MI 48126
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (U.S. ONLY)
If you believe that your vehicle has
a defect which could cause a crash
or could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Ford Motor Company.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if
it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a
recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your dealer, or Ford Motor Company.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll-free at
18004249393 (or 3660123 in the Washington D.C. area) or write to:
NHTSA
U.S. Department of Transportation
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from
the Hotline.

228
Cleaning
WASHING THE EXTERIOR
Wash your vehicle regularly with cool or lukewarm water and a neutral
Ph shampoo, such as Detail Wash (ZC-3A), which is available from your
dealer.
Never use strong household detergents or soap, such as dish washing
or laundry liquid. These products can discolor and spot painted
surfaces.
Never wash a vehicle that is hot to the touch or during exposure to
strong, direct sunlight.
Always use a clean sponge or carwash mitt with plenty of water for
best results.
Dry the vehicle with a chamois or soft terry cloth towel in order to
eliminate water spotting.
It is especially important to wash the vehicle regularly during the
winter months, as dirt and road salt are difficult to remove and cause
damage to the vehicle.
Immediately remove items such as gasoline, diesel fuel, bird droppings
and insect deposits because they can cause damage to the vehicles
paintwork and trim over time.
Remove any exterior accessories, such as antennas, before entering a
car wash.
Suntan lotions and insect repellents can damage any painted
surface; if these substances come in contact with your vehicle,
wash off as soon as possible.
WAXING
Applying a polymer paint sealant to your vehicle every six months will
assist in reducing minor scratches and paint damage.
Wash the vehicle first.
Do not use waxes that contain abrasives.
Do not allow paint sealant to come in contact with any non-body
(low-gloss black) colored trim, such as grained door handles, roof
racks, bumpers, side moldings, mirror housings or the windshield cowl
area. The paint sealant will gray or stain the parts over time.
PAINT CHIPS
Your dealer has touch-up paint and sprays to match your vehicles color.
Take your color code (printed on a sticker in the drivers door jam) to
your dealer to ensure you get the correct color.

229
Cleaning
Remove particles such as bird droppings, tree sap, insect deposits, tar
spots, road salt and industrial fallout before repairing paint chips.
Always read the instructions before using the products.

ALUMINUM WHEELS AND COVERS


Aluminum wheel rims or covers are coated with a clearcoat paint finish.
In order to maintain their shine:
Clean with Detail Wash (ZC-3A), which is available from your dealer.
Never apply any cleaning chemical to hot or warm wheel rims or
covers.
Some automatic car washes may cause damage to the finish on your
wheel rims or covers. Chemical-strength cleaners, or cleaning
chemicals, in combination with brush agitation to remove brake dust
and dirt, could wear away the clearcoat finish over time.
Do not use hydrofluoric acid-based or high caustic-based wheel
cleaners, steel wool, fuels or strong household detergent.
To remove tar and grease, use Extra Strength Tar and Road Oil
Removal (B7A-19520AA), available from your dealer.

ENGINE
Engines are more efficient when they are clean because grease and dirt
buildup keep the engine warmer than normal. When washing:
Take care when using a power washer to clean the engine. The
high-pressure fluid could penetrate the sealed parts and cause
damage.
Do not spray with cold water to avoid cracking the engine block or
other engine components.
Spray Engine Shampoo and Degreaser (F4AZ-19A536A) on all parts
that require cleaning and pressure rinse clean.
Cover the highlighted areas to prevent water damage when cleaning
the engine.

230
Cleaning

Never wash or rinse the engine while it is running; water in the


running engine may cause internal damage.
PLASTIC (NON-PAINTED) EXTERIOR PARTS
Use only approved products to clean plastic parts. These products are
available from your dealer.
For routine cleaning, use Detail Wash (ZC-3A).
If tar or grease spots are present, use Extra Strength Tar and Road Oil
Removal (B7A-19520AA).
CLEANING THE WINDSHIELD, WIPER BLADES AND REAR
WINDOW
If the wiper does not wipe properly, substances on the windshield, rear
window or the wiper blades may be the cause. These may include hot
wax treatments used by commercial car washes, tree sap, or other
organic contamination.
Do not clean the windshield or rear window glass with abrasives,
as they may cause scratches.
Do not use fuel, kerosene, or paint thinner to clean the
windshield, rear window or the wiper blades as damage may
occur.
Clean the outside of the windshield or rear window with a non-abrasive
cleaner such as Ultra Clear Spray Glass Cleaner (E4AZ-19C507AA),
available from your authorized Ford, Lincoln or Mercury dealer. If after
cleaning the glass surface, the water sheets from the glass (e.g., does not
bead), then the window is clean.

231
Cleaning
The windshield, rear window and wiper blades should be cleaned
regularly. Wiper blades can be cleaned with isopropyl (rubbing) alcohol
or windshield washer solution. Be sure to replace wiper blades when
they appear worn or do not function properly.
WINDOWS AND WIPER BLADES
The windshield, rear window and wiper blades should be cleaned
regularly. If the wiper does not wipe properly, substances on the
windshield, rear window or the wiper blades may be the cause. These
may include hot wax treatments used by commercial car washes, tree
sap, or other organic contamination. To clean these items, please follow
these tips:
The windshield or rear window may be cleaned with a non-abrasive
cleaner such as Ultra Clear Spray Glass Cleaner (E4AZ-19C507AA),
available from your dealer.
Do not use abrasives, as they may cause scratches.
Do not use fuel, kerosene, or paint thinner to clean any parts.
Wiper blades can be cleaned with isopropyl (rubbing) alcohol or
windshield washer solution. Be sure to replace wiper blades when they
appear worn or do not function properly.
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CLUSTER LENS
Clean the instrument panel with a damp cloth, then dry with a dry cloth.
Avoid cleaners or polish that increase the gloss of the upper portion of
the instrument panel. The dull finish in this area helps protect the
driver from undesirable windshield reflection.
Do not use chemical solvents or strong detergents when cleaning the
steering wheel or instrument panel to avoid contamination of the air
bag system.
Be certain to wash or wipe your hands clean if you have been in
contact with certain products such as insect repellent and suntan
lotion in order to avoid possible damage to the painted surfaces.
WOOD-TONE TRIM
Clean the area with a damp cloth, then dry by wiping with a dry, soft,
clean cloth.
Do not use household or glass cleaners as these may damage the
finish.

232
Cleaning
INTERIOR
For fabric, carpets, cloth seats and safety belts:
Remove dust and loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner.
Remove light stains and soil with Extra Strength Upholstery Cleaner
(E8AZ-19523AA).
If grease or tar is present on the material, spot-clean the area first
with Spot and Stain Remover (F3AZ-19521WA).
Never saturate the seat covers with cleaning solution.
Do not use household cleaning products or glass cleaners, which can
stain and discolor the fabric and affect the flame retardant abilities of
the seat materials.
LEATHER SEATS (IF EQUIPPED)
Your leather seating surfaces have a clear, protective coating over the
leather.
To clean, use a soft cloth with Deluxe Leather and Vinyl Cleaner
(F2AZ-19521WA). Dry the area with a soft cloth.
To help maintain its resiliency and color, use the Deluxe Leather Care
Kit (F8AZ-19G253AA), available from your authorized dealer.
Do not use household cleaning products, alcohol solutions, solvents or
cleaners intended for rubber, vinyl and plastics, or oil/petroleum-based
leather conditioners. These products may cause premature wearing of
the clear, protective coating.
UNDERBODY
Flush the complete underside of your vehicle frequently. Keep body and
door drain holes free from packed dirt.

233
Cleaning
FORD, LINCOLN AND MERCURY CAR CARE PRODUCTS
Your Ford, Lincoln or Mercury dealer has many quality products available
to clean your vehicle and protect its finishes. These quality products
have been specifically engineered to fulfill your automotive needs; they
are custom designed to complement the style and appearance of your
vehicle. Each product is made from high quality materials that meet or
exceed rigid specifications. For best results, use the following or
products of equivalent quality:
Ford Custom Clearcoat Polish*
Ford Custom Silicone Gloss Polish
Ford Custom Vinyl Protectant* (not available in Canada)
Motorcraft Vinyl Conditioner (Canada only)
Ford Deluxe Leather and Vinyl Cleaner (not available in Canada)
Motorcraft Vinyl Cleaner (Canada only)
Ford Extra Strength Tar and Road Oil Remover* (not available in
Canada)
Ford Extra Strength Upholstery Cleaner (not available in Canada)
Ford Custom Bright Metal Cleaner
Motorcraft Premium Car Wash Concentrate
Motorcraft Carlite Glass Cleaner (Canada only)
Ford Spot and Stain Remover*
Ford Super Premium Tire and Trim Dressing
Ford Triple Clean
Ford Ultra-Clear Spray Glass Cleaner (not available in Canada)
Ford Engine Shampoo and Degreaser
* May be sold with the Motorcraft name

234
Maintenance and Specifications
SERVICE RECOMMENDATIONS
To help you service your vehicle:
We highlight do-it-yourself items in the engine compartment for easy
location.
We provide a scheduled maintenance guide which makes tracking
routine service easy.
If your vehicle requires professional service, your dealership can provide
the necessary parts and service. Check your Warranty Guide to find out
which parts and services are covered.
Use only recommended fuels, lubricants, fluids and service parts
conforming to specifications. Motorcraft parts are designed and built to
provide the best performance in your vehicle.
PRECAUTIONS WHEN SERVICING YOUR VEHICLE
Be especially careful when inspecting or servicing your vehicle.
Do not work on a hot engine.
When the engine is running, keep loose clothing, jewelry or long hair
away from moving parts.
Do not work on a vehicle with the engine running in an enclosed
space, unless you are sure you have enough ventilation.
Keep all lit cigarettes, open flames and other lit material away from
the battery and all fuel related parts.
If you disconnect the battery, the engine must relearn its idle
conditions before your vehicle will drive properly, as explained in the
Battery section in this chapter.
Working with the engine off
Automatic transmission:
1. Set the parking brake and ensure the gearshift is securely latched in P
(Park).
2. Turn off the engine and remove the key.
3. Block the wheels to prevent the vehicle from moving unexpectedly.
Manual transmission:
1. Set the parking brake.
2. Depress the clutch and place the gearshift in 1 (First).
3. Turn off the engine and remove the key.

235
Maintenance and Specifications
4. Block the wheels to prevent the vehicle from moving unexpectedly.

Working with the engine on


Automatic transmission:
1. Set the parking brake and ensure the gearshift is securely latched in P
(Park).
2. Block the wheels to prevent the vehicle from moving unexpectedly.
Note: Do not start your engine with the air cleaner removed and do not
remove it while the engine is running.
Manual transmission:
1. Set the parking brake, depress the clutch and place the gearshift in
neutral.
2. Block the wheels to prevent the vehicle from moving unexpectedly.
Note: Do not start your engine with the air cleaner removed and do not
remove it while the engine is running.
The cooling fan is automatic and may come on at any time.
Always disconnect the negative terminal of the battery before
working near the fan.

OPENING THE HOOD


1. Inside the vehicle, pull the hood
release handle located under the
bottom left corner of the instrument
panel.
HOOD

236
Maintenance and Specifications
2. Go to the front of the vehicle and
release the auxiliary latch located
under the right center of the hood.
Slide the handle to release the
auxiliary latch.
3. Lift the hood until the lift
cylinders hold it open.

IDENTIFYING COMPONENTS IN THE ENGINE COMPARTMENT


5.4L V8/6.8L V10 gasoline engines
Refer to the 7.3 Liter Power Stroke Direct Injection Turbo Diesel
Owners Guide Supplement for diesel engine component locations.

1. Engine oil dipstick 6. Engine coolant reservoir


2. Clutch fluid reservoir (manual 7. Windshield washer fluid reservoir
transmission) 8. Battery
3. Brake fluid reservoir 9. Engine oil filler cap
4. Power steering fluid reservoir 10. Transmission fluid dipstick
5. Air filter assembly (automatic transmission)

237
Maintenance and Specifications
WINDSHIELD WASHER FLUID

Washer fluid
Check the washer fluid whenever
you stop for fuel. The reservoir is
highlighted with a symbol.
If the level is low, add enough fluid
to fill the reservoir. In very cold
weather, do not fill the reservoir all
the way.

Only use a washer fluid that meets Ford specification ESR-M17P5A.


Refer to Lubricant specifications in this chapter.
State or local regulations on volatile organic compounds may restrict the
use of methanol, a common windshield washer antifreeze additive.
Washer fluids containing non-methanol antifreeze agents should be used
only if they provide cold weather protection without damaging the
vehicles paint finish, wiper blades or washer system.
Note: Do not put washer fluid in the engine coolant reservoir. Washer
fluid placed in the cooling system may harm engine and cooling system
components.

ENGINE OIL

Checking the engine oil


Refer to the scheduled maintenance guide for the appropriate intervals
for checking the engine oil.
1. Make sure the vehicle is on level ground.
2. Turn the engine off and wait a few minutes for the oil to drain into the
oil pan.
3. Set the parking brake and ensure the gearshift is securely latched in P
(Park) (automatic transmission) or 1 (First) (manual transmission).
4. Open the hood. Protect yourself from engine heat.

238
Maintenance and Specifications
5. Locate and carefully remove the
engine oil level indicator (dipstick).

6. Wipe the indicator clean. Insert the indicator fully, then remove it
again.
If the oil level is between the MIN and MAX marks, the oil level is
acceptable. DO NOT ADD OIL.
If the oil level is below the MIN
mark, add enough oil to raise the
level within the MIN-MAX range.

Oil levels above the MAX mark may cause engine damage. Some oil
must be removed from the engine by a service technician.
7. Put the indicator back in and ensure it is fully seated.
Adding engine oil
1. Check the engine oil. For instructions, refer to Checking the engine
oil in this chapter.
2. If the engine oil level is not within the normal range, add only certified
engine oil of the recommended viscosity. Remove the engine oil filler cap
and use a funnel to pour the engine oil into the opening.

239
Maintenance and Specifications
3. Recheck the engine oil level. Make sure the oil level is not above the
MAX mark on the engine oil level indicator (dipstick).
4. Install the indicator and ensure it is fully seated.
5. Fully install the engine oil filler cap by turning the filler cap clockwise
1/4 of a turn until three clicks are heard or until the cap is fully seated.
To avoid possible oil loss, DO NOT operate the vehicle with the
engine oil level indicator and/or the engine oil filler cap removed.

Engine oil and filter recommendations


Look for this certification
trademark.

SAE 5W-20 engine oil is recommended.


Only use oils Certified For Gasoline Engines by the American
Petroleum Institute (API). Use Motorcraft or an equivalent oil meeting
Ford specification WSS-M2C153H. SAE 5W-20 oil provides optimum
fuel economy and durability performance meeting all
requirements for your vehicles engine.
Do not use supplemental engine oil additives, oil treatments or engine
treatments. They are unnecessary and could, under certain conditions,
lead to engine damage which is not covered by your warranty.
Change your engine oil and filter according to the appropriate schedule
listed in the scheduled maintenance guide.
Ford production and aftermarket (Motorcraft) oil filters are designed for
added engine protection and long life. If a replacement oil filter is used
that does not meet Ford material and design specifications, start-up
engine noises or knock may be experienced.
It is recommended you use the appropriate Motorcraft oil filter (or
another brand meeting Ford specifications) for your engine application.

240
Maintenance and Specifications
BATTERY
Your vehicle is equipped with a
Motorcraft maintenance-free battery
which normally does not require
additional water during its life of
service.

However, for severe usage or in high temperature climates, check the


battery electrolyte level. Refer to the scheduled maintenance guide for
the service interval schedules.
Keep the electrolyte level in each cell up to the level indicator.
Do not overfill the battery cells.
If the electrolyte level in the battery is low, you can add plain tap water
to the battery, as long as you do not use hard water (water with a high
mineral or alkali content). If possible, however, try to only fill the battery
cells with distilled water. If the battery needs water often, have the
charging system checked.
If your battery has a cover/shield, make sure it is reinstalled
after the battery has been cleaned or replaced.
For longer, trouble-free operation, keep the top of the battery clean and
dry. Also, make certain the battery cables are always tightly fastened to
the battery terminals.
If you see any corrosion on the battery or terminals, remove the cables
from the terminals and clean with a wire brush. You can neutralize the
acid with a solution of baking soda and water.
When the battery is disconnected or a new battery installed, the
transmission must learn its adaptive strategy. As a result of this, the
transmission may shift firmly. This operation is considered normal and
will fully update transmission operation to its optimum shift feel.
Batteries normally produce explosive gases which can cause
personal injury. Therefore, do not allow flames, sparks or lighted
substances to come near the battery. When working near the battery,
always shield your face and protect your eyes. Always provide proper
ventilation.

241
Maintenance and Specifications

When lifting a plastic-cased battery, excessive pressure on the


end walls could cause acid to flow through the vent caps,
resulting in personal injury and/or damage to the vehicle or battery.
Lift the battery with a battery carrier or with your hands on opposite
corners.

Keep batteries out of reach of children. Batteries contain sulfuric


acid. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Shield your eyes
when working near the battery to protect against possible splashing of
acid solution. In case of acid contact with skin or eyes, flush
immediately with water for a minimum of 15 minutes and get prompt
medical attention. If acid is swallowed, call a physician immediately.

Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and


lead compounds. Wash hands after handling.

For information on transmission operation after the battery has been


disconnected see Shift strategy in the driving section.
Because your vehicles engine is also electronically controlled by a
computer, some control conditions are maintained by power from the
battery. When the battery is disconnected or a new battery is installed,
the engine must relearn its idle and fuel trim strategy for optimum
driveability and performance. To begin this process:
1. With the vehicle at a complete stop, set the parking brake.
2. Put the gearshift in P (Park) (automatic transmission) or the neutral
position (manual transmission), turn off all accessories and start the
engine.
3. Run the engine until it reaches normal operating temperature.
4. Allow the engine to idle for at least one minute.
5. Turn the A/C on and allow the engine to idle for at least one minute.
6. Drive the vehicle to complete the relearning process.
The vehicle may need to be driven 16 km (10 miles) or more to
relearn the idle and fuel trim strategy.
If you do not allow the engine to relearn its idle trim, the idle
quality of your vehicle may be adversely affected until the idle
trim is eventually relearned.
If the battery has been disconnected or a new battery has been installed,
the clock and the preset radio stations must be reset once the battery is
reconnected.

242
Maintenance and Specifications
Always dispose of automotive

RE
AD
batteries in a responsible manner.

TU
Follow your local authorized

LE

R
standards for disposal. Call your

N
local authorized recycling center
to find out more about recycling
automotive batteries.

RECYCLE

ENGINE COOLANT

Checking engine coolant


The concentration and level of engine coolant should be checked at the
mileage intervals listed in the scheduled maintenance guide. The coolant
concentration should be maintained at 50/50 coolant and water, which
equates to a freeze point of -36 C (-34 F). Coolant concentration
testing is possible with a hydrometer or antifreeze tester (such as the
Rotunda Battery and Antifreeze Tester, 014R1060). The level of coolant
should be maintained at the cold full of cold fill range level in the
coolant reservoir. If the level falls below, add coolant per the instructions
in the Adding engine coolant section.
Your vehicle was factory-filled with a 50/50 engine coolant and water
concentration. If the concentration of coolant falls below 40% or above
60%, the engine parts could become damaged or not work properly. A
5050 mixture of coolant and water provides the following:
Freeze protection down to -36 C (-34 F).
Boiling protection up to 129 C (265 F).
Protection against rust and other forms of corrosion.
Enables calibrated gauges to work properly.

243
Maintenance and Specifications
When the engine is cold, check the
level of the engine coolant in the
reservoir.

MAX
COLD FILL
RANGE
MIN

The engine coolant should be at the cold fill level or within the cold
fill range as listed on the engine coolant reservoir (depending upon
application).
Refer to the Scheduled Maintenance Guide for service interval
schedules.
Be sure to read and understand Precautions when servicing your
vehicle in this chapter.
If the engine coolant has not been checked at the recommended interval,
the engine coolant reservoir may become low or empty. If the reservoir is
low or empty, add engine coolant to the reservoir. Refer to Adding
engine coolant in this chapter.
Note: Automotive fluids are not interchangeable; do not use engine
coolant, antifreeze or windshield washer fluid outside of its specified
function and vehicle location.

Adding engine coolant


When adding coolant, make sure it is a 50/50 mixture of engine coolant
and distilled water. Add the mixture to the coolant reservoir, when the
engine is cool, until the appropriate fill level is obtained.
Do not add engine coolant when the engine is hot. Steam and
scalding liquids released from a hot cooling system can burn you
badly. Also, you can be burned if you spill coolant on hot engine parts.

244
Maintenance and Specifications

Do not put engine coolant in the windshield washer fluid


container. If sprayed on the windshield, engine coolant could
make it difficult to see through the windshield.

The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with either green-colored


Motorcraft Premium Engine Coolant meeting Ford specification
ESE-M97B44A or yellow-colored Motorcraft Premium Gold Engine
Coolant meeting Ford Specification WSS-M97B51A1. To determine your
vehicles coolant type (color), check your coolant reservoir.
Add Motorcraft Premium Engine Coolant (green-colored),
VC-4A (U.S.) or CXC-10 (Canada) or Motorcraft Premium
Gold Engine Coolant (yellow-colored), VC-7A (VC-7B in
Oregon), depending on the type of coolant originally equipped
in your vehicle. If you are unsure which type of coolant your vehicle
requires, check your coolant reservoir or contact your local dealer.
Note: Use of Motorcraft Cooling System Stop Leak Pellets, VC-6,
darkens the color of Motorcraft Premium Gold Engine Coolant from
yellow to golden tan.
Do not add/mix an orange-colored, extended life coolant such
as Motorcraft Speciality Orange Engine Coolant, VC-2 (US) or
CXC-209 (Canada), meeting Ford specification WSS-M97B44D
with the factory-filled coolant. Mixing Motorcraft Speciality Orange
Engine Coolant or any orange-colored extended life product with your
factory filled coolant can result in degraded corrosion protection.
A large amount of water without engine coolant may be added, in case
of emergency, to reach a vehicle service location. In this instance, the
cooling system must be drained and refilled with a 50/50 mixture of
engine coolant and distilled water as soon as possible. Water alone
(without engine coolant) can cause engine damage from corrosion,
overheating or freezing.
Do not use alcohol, methanol, brine or any engine coolants
mixed with alcohol or methanol antifreeze (coolant). Alcohol
and other liquids can cause engine damage from overheating or
freezing.
Do not add extra inhibitors or additives to the coolant. These
can be harmful and compromise the corrosion protection of the engine
coolant.
Do not mix with recycled coolant unless from a Ford-approved
recycling process (see Use of Recycled engine coolant section).

245
Maintenance and Specifications
For vehicles with overflow coolant systems with a non-pressurized cap
on the coolant recovery system, add coolant to the coolant recovery
reservoir when the engine is cool. Add the proper mixture of coolant and
water to the cold full level. For all other vehicles, which have a coolant
degas system with a pressurized cap, or if it is necessary to remove the
coolant pressure relief cap on the radiator of a vehicle with an overflow
system, follow these steps to add engine coolant.
To reduce the risk of personal injury, make sure the engine is
cool before unscrewing the coolant pressure relief cap. The
cooling system is under pressure; steam and hot liquid can come out
forcefully when the cap is loosened slightly.

1. Before you begin, turn the engine off and let it cool.
2. When the engine is cool, wrap a thick cloth around the coolant
pressure relief cap on the coolant reservoir (an opaque plastic bottle).
Slowly turn cap counterclockwise (left) until pressure begins to release.
3. Step back while the pressure releases.
4. When you are sure that all the pressure has been released, use the
cloth to turn it counterclockwise and remove the cap.
5. Fill the coolant reservoir slowly with the proper coolant mixture (see
above), to within the cold fill range or the cold full level on the
reservoir. If you removed the radiator cap in an overflow system, fill the
radiator until the coolant is visible and radiator is almost full.
6. Replace the cap. Turn until tightly installed. (Cap must be tightly
installed to prevent coolant loss.)
After any coolant has been added, check the coolant concentration see
Checking Engine Coolant section). If the concentration is not 50/50
(protection to 34 F/36 C), drain some coolant and adjust the
concentration. It may take several drains and additions to obtain a 50/50
coolant concentration.
Whenever coolant has been added, the coolant level in the coolant
reservoir should be checked the next few times you drive the vehicle. If
necessary, add enough 50/50 concentration of engine coolant and
distilled water to bring the liquid level to the proper level.
If you have to add more than 1.0 liter (1.0 quart) of engine coolant per
month, have your dealer check the engine cooling system. Your cooling
system may have a leak. Operating an engine with a low level of coolant
can result in engine overheating and possible engine damage.

246
Maintenance and Specifications
Recycled engine coolant
Ford Motor Company recommends the use of a recycled engine coolant
produced by Ford-approved processes in vehicles originally equipped
with Motorcraft Premium Engine Coolant (green-colored). However, not
all coolant recycling processes produce coolant that meets Ford
specification ESE-M97B44A. Use of such coolant may harm the engine
and cooling system components.
Ford Motor Company does NOT recommend the use of recycled engine
coolant in vehicles originally equipped with Motorcraft Premium Gold
Engine Coolant since a Ford-approved recycling process is not yet
available.

Used engine coolant should be disposed of in an appropriate


manner. Follow your communitys regulations and standards for recycling
and disposing of automotive fluids.
Coolant refill capacity
To find out how much fluid your vehicles cooling system can hold, refer
to Refill capacities in this chapter.
Fill your engine coolant reservoir as outlined in Adding engine coolant
in this chapter.
Severe climates
If you drive in extremely cold climates (less than 36 C [34 F]):
It may be necessary to increase the coolant concentration
above 50%.
NEVER increase the coolant concentration above 60%.
Increased engine coolant concentrations above 60% will
decrease the overheat protection characteristics of the engine
coolant and may cause engine damage.
Refer to the chart on the coolant container to ensure the
coolant concentration in your vehicle will provide adequate
freeze protection at the temperatures in which you drive in the
winter months.
If you drive in extremely hot climates:
It is still necessary to maintain the coolant concentration
above 40%.
NEVER decrease the coolant concentration below 40%.

247
Maintenance and Specifications
Decreased engine coolant concentrations below 40% will
decrease the corrosion protection characteristics of the engine
coolant and may cause engine damage.
Decreased engine coolant concentrations below 40% will
decrease the freeze protection characteristics of the engine
coolant and may cause engine damage.
Refer to the chart on the coolant container to ensure the
coolant concentration in your vehicle will provide adequate
protection at the temperatures in which you drive.
Vehicles driven year-round in non-extreme climates should use a 50/50
mixture of engine coolant and distilled water for optimum cooling system
and engine protection.
What you should know about fail-safe cooling (if equipped)
If the engine coolant supply is depleted, this feature allows the vehicle to
be driven temporarily before incremental component damage is incurred.
The fail-safe distance depends on ambient temperatures, vehicle load
and terrain.
How fail-safe cooling works
If the engine begins to overheat:
The engine coolant temperature
gauge will move to the red (hot) H
area.
The and symbol will
illuminate.
The Service Engine Soon
C
indicator light will illuminate.
If the engine reaches a preset over-temperature condition, the engine
will automatically switch to alternating cylinder operation. Each disabled
cylinder acts as an air pump and cools the engine.
When this occurs the vehicle will still operate. However:
The engine power will be limited.
The air conditioning system will be disabled.
Continued operation will increase the engine temperature and the engine
will completely shut down, causing steering and braking effort to
increase.
Once the engine temperature cools, the engine can be re-started. Take
your vehicle to a service facility as soon as possible to minimize engine
damage.

248
Maintenance and Specifications
When fail-safe mode is activated
You have limited engine power when in the fail-safe mode, so drive the
vehicle with caution. The vehicle will not be able to maintain high-speed
operation and the engine will run rough. Remember that the engine is
capable of completely shutting down automatically to prevent engine
damage, therefore:
1. Pull off the road as soon as safely possible and turn off the engine.
2. Arrange for the vehicle to be taken to a service facility.
3. If this is not possible, wait a short period for the engine to cool.
4. Check the coolant level and replenish if low.

Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the engine is


running or hot.

5. Re-start the engine and take your vehicle to a service facility.


Driving the vehicle without repairing the engine problem
increases the chance of engine damage. Take your vehicle to a
service facility as soon as possible.

WHAT YOU SHOULD KNOW ABOUT AUTOMOTIVE FUELS

Important safety precautions


Do not overfill the fuel tank. The pressure in an overfilled tank
may cause leakage and lead to fuel spray and fire.

The fuel system may be under pressure. If the fuel filler cap is
venting vapor or if you hear a hissing sound, wait until it stops
before completely removing the fuel filler cap. Otherwise, fuel may
spray out and injure you or others.

If you do not use the proper fuel filler cap, excessive pressure or
vacuum in the fuel tank may damage the fuel system or cause
the fuel cap to disengage in a collision, which may result in possible
personal injury.

249
Maintenance and Specifications

Automotive fuels can cause serious injury or death if misused or


mishandled.

Gasoline may contain benzene, which is a cancer-causing agent.

Observe the following guidelines when handling automotive fuel:


Extinguish all smoking materials
and any open flames before
fueling your vehicle.
Always turn off the vehicle before
fueling.
Automotive fuels can be harmful
or fatal if swallowed. Fuel such as gasoline is highly toxic and if
swallowed can cause death or permanent injury. If fuel is swallowed,
call a physician immediately, even if no symptoms are immediately
apparent. The toxic effects of fuel may not be visible for hours.
Avoid inhaling fuel vapors. Inhaling too much fuel vapor of any kind
can lead to eye and respiratory tract irritation. In severe cases,
excessive or prolonged breathing of fuel vapor can cause serious
illness and permanent injury.
Avoid getting fuel liquid in your eyes. If fuel is splashed in the eyes,
remove contact lenses (if worn), flush with water for 15 minutes and
seek medical attention. Failure to seek proper medical attention could
lead to permanent injury.
Fuels can also be harmful if absorbed through the skin. If fuel is
splashed on the skin and/or clothing, promptly remove contaminated
clothing and wash skin thoroughly with soap and water. Repeated or
prolonged skin contact with fuel liquid or vapor causes skin irritation.
Be particularly careful if you are taking Antabuse or other forms of
disulfiram for the treatment of alcoholism. Breathing gasoline vapors,
or skin contact could cause an adverse reaction. In sensitive
individuals, serious personal injury or sickness may result. If fuel is
splashed on the skin, promptly wash skin thoroughly with soap and
water. Consult a physician immediately if you experience an adverse
reaction.

250
Maintenance and Specifications

When refueling always shut the engine off and never allow
sparks or open flames near the filler neck. Never smoke while
refueling. Fuel vapor is extremely hazardous under certain conditions.
Care should be taken to avoid inhaling excess fumes.

The flow of fuel through a fuel pump nozzle can produce static
electricity, which can cause a fire if fuel is pumped into an
ungrounded fuel container.

Use the following guidelines to avoid static build-up when filling an


ungrounded fuel container:
Place approved fuel container on the ground.
DO NOT fill a fuel container while it is in the vehicle (including the
cargo area).
Keep the fuel pump nozzle in contact with the fuel container while
filling.
DO NOT use a device that would hold the fuel pump handle in the fill
position.
Fuel Filler Cap
Your fuel tank filler cap has an indexed design with a 1/8 turn on/off
feature.
When fueling your vehicle:
1. Turn the engine off.
2. Carefully turn the filler cap counterclockwise 1/8 of a turn until it
stops.
3. Pull to remove the cap from the fuel filler pipe.
4. To install the cap, align the tabs on the cap with the notches on the
filler pipe.
5. Turn the filler cap clockwise 1/8 of a turn until it stops.
If the Service Engine Soon/Check Engine indicator comes on and stays
on after you start the engine, the fuel filler cap may not be properly
installed. Turn off the engine, remove the fuel filler cap, align the cap
properly and reinstall it.
If you must replace the fuel filler cap, replace it with a fuel filler
cap that is designed for your vehicle. The customer warranty may

251
Maintenance and Specifications
be void for any damage to the fuel tank or fuel system if the
correct genuine Ford or Motorcraft fuel filler cap is not used.
The fuel system may be under pressure. If the fuel filler cap is
venting vapor or if you hear a hissing sound, wait until it stops
before completely removing the fuel filler cap. Otherwise, fuel may
spray out and injure you or others.

If you do not use the proper fuel filler cap, excessive pressure or
vacuum in the fuel tank may damage the fuel system or cause
the fuel cap to disengage in a collision, which may result in possible
personal injury.

Choosing the right fuel


Use only UNLEADED FUEL. The use of leaded fuel is prohibited by law
and could damage your vehicle.
Do not use fuel containing methanol. It can damage critical fuel system
components.
Your vehicle was not designed to use fuel or fuel additives with metallic
compounds, including manganese-based compounds containing MMT.
Repairs to correct the effects of using a fuel for which your vehicle was
not designed may not be covered by your warranty.
Octane recommendations
Your vehicle is designed to use

87
Regular unleaded gasoline with
pump (R+M)/2 octane rating of 87.
We do not recommend the use of (R+M)/2 METHOD
gasolines labeled as Regular that
are sold with octane ratings of 86 or lower in high altitude areas.
Do not be concerned if your engine sometimes knocks lightly. However, if
it knocks heavily under most driving conditions while you are using fuel
with the recommended octane rating, see your dealer or a qualified
service technician to prevent any engine damage.
Fuel quality
If you are experiencing starting, rough idle or hesitation driveability
problems during a cold start, try a different brand of Regular unleaded
gasoline. Premium unleaded gasoline is not recommended (particularly

252
Maintenance and Specifications
in the United States) because it may cause these problems to become
more pronounced. If the problems persist, see your dealer or a qualified
service technician.
It should not be necessary to add any aftermarket products to your fuel
tank if you continue to use high quality fuel of the recommended octane
rating. Aftermarket products could cause damage to the fuel system.
Repairs to correct the effects of using an aftermarket product in your
fuel may not be covered by your warranty.
Many of the worlds automakers
issued the World-wide Fuel Charter
that recommends gasoline
specifications to provide improved
performance and emission control
system protection for your vehicle.
Gasolines that meet the World-wide
Fuel Charter should be used when
available. Ask your fuel supplier
about gasolines that meet the
World-wide Fuel Charter. In Canada,
look for fuels that display the Auto Makers Choicey logo.
Cleaner air
Ford endorses the use of reformulated cleaner-burning gasolines to
improve air quality.
Running out of fuel
Avoid running out of fuel because this situation may have an adverse
affect on powertrain components.
If you have run out of fuel:
You may need to cycle the ignition from OFF to ON several times after
refueling, to allow the fuel system to pump the fuel from the tank to
the engine.
Your Service Engine Soon indicator may come on. For more
information on the Service Engine Soon indicator, refer to the
Instrument cluster chapter.
Fuel Filter
For fuel filter replacement, see your dealer or a qualified service
technician. Refer to the scheduled maintenance guide for the appropriate
intervals for changing the fuel filter.

253
Maintenance and Specifications
Replace the fuel filter with an authorized Motorcraft part. The
customer warranty may be void for any damage to the fuel system
if an authorized Motorcraft fuel filter is not used.
ESSENTIALS OF GOOD FUEL ECONOMY
Measuring techniques
Your best source of information about actual fuel economy is you, the
driver. You must gather information as accurately and consistently as
possible. Fuel expense, frequency of fillups or fuel gauge readings are
NOT accurate as a measure of fuel economy. We do not recommend
taking fuel economy measurements during the first 1 600 km (1 000 miles)
of driving (engine break-in period). You will get a more accurate
measurement after 3 000 km5 000 km (2 000 miles-3 000 miles).
Filling the tank
The advertised fuel capacity of the fuel tank on your vehicle is equal to
the rated refill capacity of the fuel tank as listed in the Refill capacities
section of this chapter.
The advertised capacity is the amount of the indicated capacity and the
empty reserve combined. Indicated capacity is the difference in the
amount of fuel in a full tank and a tank when the fuel gauge indicates
empty. Empty reserve is the small amount of fuel remaining in the fuel
tank after the fuel gauge indicates empty.
The amount of usable fuel in the empty reserve varies and should
not be relied upon to increase driving range. When refueling your
vehicle after the fuel gauge indicates empty, you might not be
able to refuel the full amount of the advertised capacity of the
fuel tank due to the empty reserve still present in the tank.
For consistent results when filling the fuel tank:
Turn the engine/ignition switch to the off position prior to refueling,
an error in the reading will result if the engine is left running.
Use the same filling rate setting (low medium high) each time
the tank is filled.
Allow no more than 2 automatic click-offs when filling.
Always use fuel with the recommended octane rating.
Use a known quality gasoline, preferably a national brand.
Use the same side of the same pump and have the vehicle facing the
same direction each time you fill up.

254
Maintenance and Specifications
Have the vehicle loading and distribution the same every time.
Your results will be most accurate if your filling method is consistent.
Calculating fuel economy
1. Fill the fuel tank completely and record the initial odometer reading
(in kilometers or miles).
2. Each time you fill the tank, record the amount of fuel added (in liters
or gallons).
3. After at least three to five tank fill-ups, fill the fuel tank and record
the current odometer reading.
4. Subtract your initial odometer reading from the current odometer
reading.
5. Follow one of the simple calculations in order to determine fuel
economy:
Multiply liters used by 100, then divide by total kilometers
traveled.
Divide total miles traveled by total gallons used.
Keep a record for at least one month and record the type of driving (city
or highway). This will provide an accurate estimate of the vehicles fuel
economy under current driving conditions. Additionally, keeping records
during summer and winter will show how temperature impacts fuel
economy. In general, lower temperatures give lower fuel economy.
Driving style good driving and fuel economy habits
Give consideration to the lists that follow and you may be able to change
a number of variables and improve your fuel economy.
Habits
Smooth, moderate operation can yield up to 10% savings in fuel.
Steady speeds without stopping will usually give the best fuel
economy.
Idling for long periods of time (greater than one minute) may waste
fuel.
Anticipate stopping; slowing down may eliminate the need to stop.
Sudden or hard accelerations may reduce fuel economy.
Slow down gradually.
Driving at reasonable speeds (traveling at 88 km/h [55 mph] uses 15%
less fuel than traveling at 105 km/h [65 mph]).

255
Maintenance and Specifications
Revving the engine before turning it off may reduce fuel economy.
Using the air conditioner or defroster may reduce fuel economy.
You may want to turn off the speed control in hilly terrain if
unnecessary shifting between third and fourth gear occurs.
Unnecessary shifting of this type could result in reduced fuel
economy.
Warming up a vehicle on cold mornings is not required and may
reduce fuel economy.
Resting your foot on the brake pedal while driving may reduce fuel
economy.
Combine errands and minimize stop-and-go driving.
Maintenance
Keep tires properly inflated and use only recommended size.
Operating a vehicle with the wheels out of alignment will reduce fuel
economy.
Use recommended engine oil. Refer to Lubricant specifications in
this chapter.
Perform all regularly scheduled maintenance items. Follow the
recommended maintenance schedule and owner maintenance checks
found in your vehicle scheduled maintenance guide.
Conditions
Heavily loading a vehicle or towing a trailer may reduce fuel economy
at any speed.
Carrying unnecessary weight may reduce fuel economy (approximately
0.4 km/L [1 mpg] is lost for every 180 kg [400 lb] of weight carried).
Adding certain accessories to your vehicle (for example bug
deflectors, rollbars/light bars, running boards, ski/luggage racks) may
reduce fuel economy.
Using fuel blended with alcohol may lower fuel economy.
Fuel economy may decrease with lower temperatures during the first
1216 km (810 miles) of driving.
Driving on flat terrain offers improved fuel economy as compared to
driving on hilly terrain.
Transmissions give their best fuel economy when operated in the top
cruise gear and with steady pressure on the gas pedal.

256
Maintenance and Specifications
Four-wheel-drive operation (if equipped) is less fuel efficient than
two-wheel-drive operation.
Close windows for high speed driving.
EPA window sticker
Every new vehicle should have the EPA window sticker. Contact your
dealer if the window sticker is not supplied with your vehicle. The EPA
window sticker should be your guide for the fuel economy comparisons
with other vehicles.
It is important to note the box in the lower left corner of the window
sticker. These numbers represent the Range of L/100 km (MPG)
expected on the vehicle under optimum conditions. Your fuel economy
may vary depending upon the method of operation and conditions.
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with various emission control components and a
catalytic converter which will enable your vehicle to comply with
applicable exhaust emission standards. To make sure that the catalytic
converter and other emission control components continue to work
properly:
Use only the specified fuel listed.
Avoid running out of fuel.
Do not turn off the ignition while your vehicle is moving, especially at
high speeds.
Have the items listed in your scheduled maintenance guide performed
according to the specified schedule.
The scheduled maintenance items listed in the scheduled maintenance
guide are essential to the life and performance of your vehicle and to its
emissions system.
If other than Ford, Motorcraft or Ford-authorized parts are used for
maintenance replacements or for service of components affecting
emission control, such non-Ford parts should be equivalent to genuine
Ford Motor Company parts in performance and durability.
Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle in dry grass or other dry
ground cover. The emission system heats up the engine
compartment and exhaust system, which can start a fire.

Illumination of the Service Engine Soon light, charging system warning


light or the temperature warning light, fluid leaks, strange odors, smoke
or loss of engine power, could indicate that the emission control system
is not working properly.

257
Maintenance and Specifications

Exhaust leaks may result in entry of harmful and potentially


lethal fumes into the passenger compartment.

Do not make any unauthorized changes to your vehicle or engine. By


law, vehicle owners and anyone who manufactures, repairs, services,
sells, leases, trades vehicles, or supervises a fleet of vehicles are not
permitted to intentionally remove an emission control device or prevent
it from working. Information about your vehicles emission system is on
the Vehicle Emission Control Information Decal located on or near the
engine. This decal identifies engine displacement and gives some tune up
specifications.
Please consult your Warranty Guide for complete emission warranty
information.

Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) testing


In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass an I/M test of
the on-board diagnostics system. If your Check Engine/Service Engine
Soon light is on, refer to the description in the Warning lights and
chimes section of the Instrument cluster chapter. Your vehicle may not
pass the I/M test with the Check Engine/Service Engine Soon light on.
If the vehicles powertrain system or its battery has just been serviced,
the on-board diagnostics system is reset to a not ready for I/M test
condition. To ready the on-board diagnostics system for I/M testing, a
minimum of 30 minutes of city and highway driving is necessary as
described below:
First, at least 10 minutes of driving on an expressway or highway.
Next, at least 20 minutes driving in stop-and-go, city-type traffic with
at least four idle periods.
Allow the vehicle to sit for at least eight hours without starting the
engine. Then, start the engine and complete the above driving cycle. The
engine must warm up to its normal operating temperature. Once started,
do not turn off the engine until the above driving cycle is complete.

258
Maintenance and Specifications
CHECKING AND ADDING POWER STEERING FLUID
Check the power steering fluid.
Refer to the scheduled maintenance
guide for the service interval
schedules. If adding fluid is
necessary, use only MERCONt ATF.

Check the fluid level when it is at ambient temperature, 20 80 F


(-7 25 C):
1. Check the fluid level on the dipstick. It should be between the arrows
in the FULL COLD range. Do not add fluid if the level is within this
range.
2. If the fluid level is low, start the engine.
3. While the engine idles, turn the steering wheel left and right several
times.
4. Turn the engine off.
5. Recheck the fluid level on the dipstick. Do not add fluid if the level is
between the arrows in the FULL COLD range.
6. If the fluid is low, add fluid in small amounts, continuously checking
the level until it reaches the FULL COLD range. Be sure to put the
dipstick back in the reservoir.

259
Maintenance and Specifications
BRAKE FLUID
Checking and adding brake fluid
Brake fluid should be checked and
refilled as needed. Refer to the
scheduled maintenance guide for
the service interval schedules.
1. Clean the reservoir cap before
removal to prevent dirt or water
from entering the reservoir.

2. Visually inspect the fluid level.


3. If necessary, add brake fluid from
a clean un-opened container until
MAX
the level reaches MAX. Do not fill
above this line.
4. Use only a DOT 3 brake fluid
certified to meet Ford specification ESA-M6C25A. Refer to Lubricant
specifications in this chapter.
Brake fluid is toxic. If brake fluid contacts the eyes, flush eyes
with running water for 15 minutes. Seek medical attention if
irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce vomiting.
Seek medical attention immediately.

If you use a brake fluid that is not DOT 3, you will cause
permanent damage to your brakes.

Do not let the reservoir for the master cylinder run dry. This
may cause the brakes to fail.

260
Maintenance and Specifications
CLUTCH FLUID (IF EQUIPPED)
Check the clutch fluid level. Refer to the scheduled maintenance guide
for the service interval schedules.
Use only a DOT 3 brake fluid designed to meet Ford specification
ESA-M6C25A. Refer to Lubricant Specifications in this chapter.
Brake fluid is toxic. If brake fluid contacts the eyes, flush eyes
with running water for 15 minutes. Seek medical if irritation
persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce vomiting. Seek
medical attention immediately.

During normal operation, the fluid level in the clutch reservoir should
remain constant or rise slightly. If the fluid level drops, refill the fluid
level to the step in the reservoir.
1. Clean the reservoir cap before
removal to prevent dirt and water
from entering the reservoir.
2. Remove cap and rubber
diaphragm from reservoir.
3. Add fluid until the level reaches
the step in the reservoir.
4. Reinstall rubber diaphragm and
cap onto reservoir.

TRANSMISSION FLUID
Checking automatic transmission fluid (if equipped)
Refer to your scheduled maintenance guide for scheduled intervals for
fluid checks and changes. Your transmission does not consume fluid.

261
Maintenance and Specifications
However, the fluid level should be checked if the transmission is not
working properly, i.e., if the transmission slips or shifts slowly or if you
notice some sign of fluid leakage.
Automatic transmission fluid expands when warmed. To obtain an
accurate fluid check, drive the vehicle until it is at normal operating
temperature (approximately 30 km [20 miles]). If your vehicle has been
operated for an extended period at high speeds, in city traffic during hot
weather or pulling a trailer, the vehicle should be turned off for about 30
minutes to allow fluid to cool before checking.
1. Drive the vehicle 30 km (20 miles) or until it reaches normal operating
temperature.
2. Park the vehicle on a level surface and engage the parking brake.
3. With the parking brake engaged and your foot on the brake pedal,
start the engine and move the gearshift lever through all of the gear
ranges. Allow sufficient time for each gear to engage.
4. Latch the gearshift lever in P (Park) and leave the engine running.
5. Remove the dipstick, wiping it clean with a clean, dry lint free rag. If
necessary, refer to Identifying components in the engine compartment
in this chapter for the location of the dipstick.
6. Install the dipstick making sure it is fully seated in the filler tube.
7. Remove the dipstick and inspect the fluid level. The fluid should be in
the designated area for normal operating temperature or ambient
temperature.
Low fluid level
Do not drive the vehicle if the fluid
level is at the bottom of the dipstick
and the ambient temperature is ADD COLD HOT DO NOT ADD

above 10C (50F).


Correct fluid level DON'T ADD IF IN CROSSHATCHED AREA CHECK WHEN HOT IDLING IN PARK

The transmission fluid should be


checked at normal operating temperature 66C-77C (150F-170F) on a
level surface. The normal operating temperature can be reached after
approximately 30 km (20 miles) of driving.
You can check the fluid without driving if the ambient temperature is
above 10C (50F). However, if fluid is added at this time, an overfill
condition could result when the vehicle reaches normal operating
temperature.

262
Maintenance and Specifications
The transmission fluid should be in
this range if at normal operating
temperature (66C-77C ADD COLD HOT DO NOT ADD

[150F-170F]).

DON'T ADD IF IN CROSSHATCHED AREA CHECK WHEN HOT IDLING IN PARK

The transmission fluid should be in


this range if at ambient temperature
(10C-35C [50F-95F]). ADD COLD HOT DO NOT ADD

DON'T ADD IF IN CROSSHATCHED AREA CHECK WHEN HOT IDLING IN PARK

High fluid level


Fluid levels above the safe range
may result in transmission failure.
An overfill condition of transmission ADD COLD HOT DO NOT ADD

fluid may cause shift and/or


engagement concerns and/or
possible damage. DON'T ADD IF IN CROSSHATCHED AREA CHECK WHEN HOT IDLING IN PARK

High fluid levels can be caused by


an overheating condition.
Adjusting automatic transmission fluid levels
Before adding any fluid, make sure the correct type is used. The type of
fluid used is normally indicated on the dipstick and also in the
Lubricant specifications section in this chapter.
Use of a non-approved automatic transmission fluid may cause
internal transmission component damage.
If necessary, add fluid in 250 ml (1/2 pint) increments through the filler
tube until the level is correct.
If an overfill occurs, excess fluid
should be removed by a qualified
technician. ADD COLD HOT DO NOT ADD

An overfill condition of
transmission fluid may cause
shift and/or engagement DON'T ADD IF IN CROSSHATCHED AREA CHECK WHEN HOT IDLING IN PARK

concerns and/or possible


damage.

263
Maintenance and Specifications
Do not use supplemental transmission fluid additives, treatments or
cleaning agents. The use of these materials may affect transmission
operation and result in damage to internal transmission components.

Checking and adding manual transmission fluid (if equipped)


1. Clean the filler plug.
2. Remove the filler plug and
inspect the fluid level.

3. Fluid level should be at bottom of


the opening.
4. Add enough fluid through the
filler opening so that the fluid level
is at the bottom of the opening.
5. Install and tighten the fill plug
securely.

Use only fluid that meets Ford specifications. Refer to Lubricant


Specifications in this chapter.

264
Maintenance and Specifications
Checking and adding transfer case fluid (if equipped)
1. Clean the filler plug.
2. Remove the filler plug and
inspect the fluid level.

3. Add only enough fluid through


the filler opening so that the fluid
level is at the bottom of the
opening.

Use only fluid that meets Ford specifications. Refer to Lubricant


Specifications in this chapter.
DRIVELINE UNIVERSAL JOINT AND SLIP YOKE
Your vehicle may be equipped with universal joints that require
lubrication. Refer to the scheduled maintenance guide for maintenance
intervals. If the original universal joints are replaced with universal joints
equipped with grease fittings, lubrication will also be necessary.
AIR FILTER MAINTENANCE
Refer to the scheduled maintenance guide for the appropriate intervals
for changing the air filter element.
When changing the air filter element, use only the Motorcraft air filter
element listed. Refer to Motorcraft Part Numbers.
Note: Do not start your engine with the air cleaner removed and do not
remove it while the engine is running.

265
Maintenance and Specifications
Changing the air filter element (gasoline engines only)
1. Loosen the clamp that secures
the air filter element in place.

2. Carefully separate the two halves


of the air filter housing.
3. Remove the air filter element
from the open end of the air filter
housing.

4. Install a new air filter element, ensuring the arrow on the top half of
the air filter housing lines up with the notch on the bottom half of air
filter housing. Be careful not to crimp the filter element edges between
the air filter housing. This could cause filter damage and allow
unmetered air to enter the engine if not properly seated.
5. Replace the two halves of the air filter housing and secure the clamp.

266
Maintenance and Specifications
INFORMATION ABOUT UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING
New vehicles are fitted with tires
that have a rating on them called
Tire Quality Grades. The Quality
grades can be found where
applicable on the tire sidewall
between tread shoulder and
maximum section width. For
example:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
These Tire Quality Grades are determined by standards that the United
States Department of Transportation has set.
Tire Quality Grades apply to new pneumatic tires for use on passenger
cars. They do not apply to deep tread, winter-type snow tires,
space-saver or temporary use spare tires, tires with nominal rim
diameters of 10 to 12 inches or limited production tires as defined in
Title 49 Code of Federal Regulations Part 575.104(c)(2).
U.S. Department of Transportation-Tire quality grades: The U.S.
Department of Transportation requires Ford to give you the following
information about tire grades exactly as the government has written it.

Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of
the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified
government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one
and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual
conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the
norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices, and
differences in road characteristics and climate.

Traction AA A B C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest are AA, A, B, and C. The
grades represent the tires ability to stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction
performance.

267
Maintenance and Specifications

The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on


straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include
acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics.

Temperature A B C
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C, representing the
tires resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance
which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by
law.
The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that
is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.

SERVICING YOUR TIRES


Checking the tire pressure
Use an accurate tire pressure gauge.
Check the tire pressure when tires are cold, after the vehicle has been
parked for at least one hour or has been driven less than 5 km
(3 miles).
Adjust tire pressure to recommended specifications found on the
Certification Label. Tire pressure information can also be found on the
Tire Information label located on the inside of the fuel filler door.
Improperly inflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail
suddenly, possibly resulting in loss of vehicle control.

Tire inflation information


The F450 and F550 vehicles are equipped with a tire that is an all-steel
radial. All-steel radial tires utilize steel cords in the sidewalls, and also
require increased inflation pressures of up to 95 psi. As such, they

268
Maintenance and Specifications
cannot be treated like normal light truck tires. Tire service, including
adjusting tire pressure, must be performed by personnel trained,
supervised and equipped according to Federal Occupational Safety and
Health Administration (OSHA) regulations. For example, during any
procedure involving tire inflation, the technician or individual must
utilize a remote inflation device, and insure that all persons are clear of
the trajectory area.

WARNINGAn inflated tire and rim can be very dangerous if


improperly used, serviced or maintained. To avoid serious injury,
never attempt to re-inflate a tire which has been run flat or seriously
under-inflated without first removing the tire from the wheel assembly
for inspection. Do not attempt to add air to tires or replace tires or
wheels without first taking precautions to protect persons and
property.

269
Maintenance and Specifications
Tire rotation
Because your vehicles tires perform different jobs, they often wear
differently. To make sure your tires wear evenly and last longer, rotate
them as indicated in the scheduled maintenance guide. If you notice that
the tires wear unevenly, have them checked.
The following procedure applies to vehicles equipped with single rear
wheels, if your vehicle is equipped with dual rear wheels it is
recommended that only the front wheels be rotated (side to side).
Four tire rotation

Five tire rotation

270
Maintenance and Specifications
Replacing the tires
Replace the tires when the wear
band is visible through the tire
treads.

When replacing full size tires, never mix radial bias-belted, or


bias-type tires. Use only the tire sizes that are listed on the
Certification Label. Make sure that all tires are the same size, speed
rating, and load-carrying capacity. Use only the tire combinations
recommended on the label. If you do not follow these precautions,
your vehicle may not drive properly and safely.

Make sure that all replacement tires are of the same size, type,
load-carrying capacity and tread design (e.g., All Terrain,
Touring, etc.), as originally offered by Ford.

Do not replace your tires with high performance tires or larger


size tires.

Failure to follow these precautions may adversely affect the


handling of the vehicle and make it easier for the driver to lose
control and roll over.

Tires that are larger or smaller than your vehicles original tires may also
affect the accuracy of your speedometer.
SNOW TIRES AND CHAINS
Snow tires must be the same size and grade as the tires you
currently have on your vehicle.

271
Maintenance and Specifications
The tires on your vehicle have all weather treads to provide traction in
rain and snow. However, in some climates, you may need to use snow
tires and chains. If you need to use chains, it is recommended that steel
wheels (of the same size and specifications) be used as chains may chip
aluminum wheels.
Follow these guidelines when using snow tires and chains:
Use only SAE Class S chains.
Install chains securely, verifying that the chains do not touch any
wiring, brake lines or fuel lines.
Drive cautiously. If you hear the chains rub or bang against your
vehicle, stop and re-tighten the chains. If this does not work, remove
the chains to prevent damage to your vehicle.
If possible, avoid fully loading your vehicle.
Remove the tire chains when they are no longer needed. Do not use
tire chains on dry roads.
The suspension insulation and bumpers will help prevent vehicle
damage. Do not remove these components from your vehicle when
using snow tires and chains.

MOTORCRAFT PART NUMBERS


Component* 5.4L V8 engine 6.8L V10 engine
Air filter element FA-1634 FA-1634
Fuel filter FG-986B FG-986B
Oil filter FL-820-S FL-820-S
PCV valve EV-233 EV-233
Battery (Standard) BXT-65-650 BXT-65-650
Battery (Optional) BXT-65-750 BXT-65-750
Spark plugs-platinum** AGSF-22W AGSF-22W
*Refer to the 7.3 Liter Power Stroke Direct Injection Turbo Diesel
Owners Guide Supplement for Motorcraft diesel engine service part
numbers.
**Refer to Vehicle Emissions Control Information (VECI) decal for spark
plug gap information.

272
Maintenance and Specifications
REFILL CAPACITIES
Ford Part
Fluid Application Capacity
Name
Front axle Motorcraft SAE F-250/350 1.8L (3.8 pints)
75W-90 (Dana 50 axle)
Premium 4x4
F-350/450/550 2.7L (5.8 pints)
Front Axle
(Dana 60 axle)
Lubricant
Rear axle 1,2 Motorcraft SAE F-250 /350 3.3L (6.9 pints)
75W-140 (10.50 inch
Synthetic Rear axle)
Axle Lubricant
Motorcraft SAE F-350/450 4.0L (8.5 pints)
75W-90 (DANA 80)
Synthetic Rear
Axle Lubricant
Motorcraft SAE F-550 11.6L (24.5
80W-90 (Dana 135) pints)
Premium Rear
Axle Lubricant
Brake fluid (and Motorcraft High All Fill to line or
clutch fluid-if Performance step (for clutch)
equipped) DOT 3 Motor on reservoir
Vehicle Brake
Fluid
Engine coolant 3 Motorcraft 5.4L V8 engine 25.0L (26.4
Premium Engine with A/C quarts)
Coolant
(green-colored)
or Motorcraft 6.8L V10 engine 27.0L (28.5
Premium Gold quarts)
Engine Coolant
(yellow-colored)

273
Maintenance and Specifications

Ford Part
Fluid Application Capacity
Name
Engine oil Motorcraft SAE All 5.7L (6.0
(includes filter 5W-20 Super quarts)
change)-Gas Premium Motor
engines Oil
Engine oil Refer to your 7.3L Diesel Supplement
(includes filter
change)-Diesel
engine
Fuel tank N/A Mid-ship tank 71.9L (19.0
(optional on gallons)
Chassis Cab)
Right side 87.1L (23.0
saddle mounted gallons)
tank (optional
on Chassis Cab)
Short box 109.8L (29.0
gallons)
Long box 143.9L (38.0
gallons)
Aft axle 151.4L (40.0
gallons)
Power steering Motorcraft All Fill to line on
fluid MERCONt ATF reservoir
Transfer case Motorcraft 4x4 vehicles 1.9L (2.0
fluid MERCONt ATF quarts)
Transmission Motorcraft 6-speed manual 5.5L (5.8
fluid 4 MERCONt ATF quarts) 5
Automatic 16.7L (17.7
quarts) 6
Windshield Ultra-Clear All 4.0L (4.25
washer fluid Windshield quarts)
Washer
Concentrate

274
Maintenance and Specifications
1
Your vehicles rear axle(s) may be filled with a synthetic lubricant that
may require a lubricant change. Refer to the scheduled maintenance
guide. Axle lubricant quantities should not need to be checked unless a
leak is suspected, service is required or the axle assembly has been
submerged in water. The axle lubricant should be changed any time the
rear axle has been submerged in water.
2
Add 236 ml (8 oz.) of Additive Friction Modifier C8AZ-19B546-A or
equivalent meeting Ford Specification EST-M2C118-A for complete refill
of Traction-Lok axles.
3
Add the coolant type originally equipped in your vehicle.
4
Ensure the correct automatic transmission fluid is used. Transmission
fluid requirements are indicated on the dipstick or on the dipstick
handle. Check the container to verify the fluid being added is of the
correct type. Refer to your scheduled maintenance guide to determine
the correct service interval.
Some transmission fluids may be labeled as dual usage, such as
MERCONt and MERCONt V. These dual usage fluids are not to be used
in an automatic transmission that requires use of the MERCONt type
fluid. However, these dual usage fluids may be used in transmissions that
require the MERCONt V type fluid.
MERCONt and MERCONt V type fluids are not interchangeable.
DO NOT mix MERCONt and MERCONt V. Use of a transmission
fluid that indicates dual usage (MERCONt and MERCONt V) in
an automatic transmission application requiring MERCONt may
cause transmission damage. Use of any fluid other than the
recommended fluid may cause transmission damage.
5
Service refill capacity is determined by filling the transmission to the
bottom of the filler hole with the vehicle on a level surface. The 6speed
manual transmission is equipped with an in-tank cooler. Verify the fluid
level after operating vehicle to assure correct fluid level.
6
Indicates only approximate dry-fill capacity. Some applications may vary
based on cooler size and if equipped with an in-tank cooler. The amount
of transmission fluid and fluid level should be set by the indication on
the dipsticks normal operating range.

275
Maintenance and Specifications
LUBRICANT SPECIFICATIONS
Ford part
Ford part Ford
Item name or
number specification
equivalent
High E8TZ-19590A ESA-M1C198A
Temperature
Spindle bearing 4X4 Front Axle
and Wheel
Bearing Grease
Motorcraft SAE XY-75W90-TQL WSP-M2C201-A
75W-90
Front axle
Premium 4x4
(4X4)
Front Axle
Lubricant
Motorcraft SAE XY-75W140QL WSL-M2C192-A
75W-140 High
Performance
Synthetic Rear
Axle Lube 1
Motorcraft SAE XY-75W90GLS
75W-90
Rear axle Synthetic Rear
Axle Lubricant
Motorcraft SAE XY-80W90-QL WSP-M2C197-A
80W-90
Premium Rear
Axle Lubricant
(Dana 135
axles) 1
Motorcraft High PM-1 ESA-M6C25-A
Brake fluid and Performance and DOT 3
clutch fluid (if DOT 3 Motor
equipped) Vehicle Brake
Fluid

276
Maintenance and Specifications

Ford part
Ford part Ford
Item name or
number specification
equivalent
Engine coolant Motorcraft VC-4A (in ESE-M97B44-A
Premium Engine Canada,
Coolant Motorcraft
(green-colored) CXC-10)
Motorcraft VC-7A WSS-M97B51-A1
Premium Gold
Engine Coolant
(yellow-colored)
Motorcraft SAE XO-5W20-QSP WSS-M2C153-H
5W-20 Super and API
Engine oil
Premium Motor Certification
Oil Mark
Hinges, latches, Multi-Purpose XG4 or ESR-M1C159-A
striker plates, Grease F5AZ-19G209-AA
fuel filler door
hinge and seat
tracks
Motorcraft XL-1 none
Lock cylinders penetrating and
lock lubricant
Transmission Motorcraft XG-1-C or ESA-M1C75-B
/steering/parking Premium XG-1-K
brake linkages Long-Life Grease
and pivots,
brake and clutch
pedal shaft (if
equipped)
Power steering Motorcraft XT-2-QDX MERCONt
fluid and MERCONt ATF
transfer case
fluid (if
equipped)

277
Maintenance and Specifications

Ford part
Ford part Ford
Item name or
number specification
equivalent
Manual Motorcraft XT-2-QDX MERCONt
transmission MERCONt ATF
2
(6-speed)
Motorcraft XT-2-QDX MERCONt
Automatic
MERCONt ATF
transmission 2

Ultra-clear C9AZ-19550-AC ESR-M17P5-A


Windshield Windshield
washer fluid Washer
Concentrate
1
Add 236 ml (8 oz.) of Additive Friction Modifier C8AZ-19B546-A or
equivalent meeting Ford specification EST-M2C118-A for complete refill
of Traction-Lok axles. Ford design rear axles contain a synthetic
lubricant that does not require changing unless the axle has been
submerged in water. Dana rear axles also contain a synthetic lubricant
but do require a change. Refer to your Service Guide for change
intervals on Dana rear axles.
2
Ensure the correct automatic transmission fluid is used. Transmission
fluid requirements are indicated on the dipstick or on the dipstick
handle. Check the container to verify the fluid being added is of the
correct type. Refer to your scheduled maintenance guide to determine
the correct service interval.
Some transmission fluids may be labeled as dual usage, such as
MERCONt and MERCONt V. These dual usage fluids are not to be used
in an automatic transmission that requires use of the MERCONt type
fluid. However, these dual usage fluids may be used in transmissions that
require the MERCONt V type fluid.
MERCONt and MERCONt V type fluids are not interchangeable.
DO NOT mix MERCONt and MERCONt V. Use of a transmission
fluid that indicates dual usage (MERCONt and MERCONt V) in
an automatic transmission application requiring MERCONt may
cause transmission damage. Use of any fluid other than the
recommended fluid may cause transmission damage.

278
Maintenance and Specifications
ENGINE DATA
Engine 5.4L V8 engine 6.8L V10 engine
Cubic inches 330 415
Required fuel 87 octane 87 octane
Firing order 1-3-7-2-6-5-4-8 1-6-5-10-2-7-3-8-4-9
1.3-1.4 mm 1.3-1.4 mm
Spark plug gap
(0.052-0.056 inch) (0.052-0.056 inch)
Ignition system Coil on plug Coil on plug
Compression ratio 9.0:1 9.0:1

VEHICLE DIMENSIONS

F250Regular and Super Cab


Dimension Body style
Regular Regular Super Cab Super Cab
Cab 4x2 Cab 4x4 4x2 4x4
(1) Overall 1935 mm 2 005 mm 1 946 mm 2 015 mm
height (76.2 in) (78.9 in) (76.5 in) (79.3 in)
(2) Track 1 745 mm 1 736 mm 1 745 mm 1 736 mm
(Front / (68.7 in) / (68.3 in) / (68.7 in) / (68.3 in) /
Rear) 1 729 mm 1 729.3 mm 1 729.3 mm 1 729.3 mm
(68 in) (68 in) (68 in) (68 in)
(3) Overall 2 031 mm 2 031 mm 2 031 mm 2 031 mm
width (79.9 in) (79.9 in) (79.9 in) (79.9 in)
(4) 3 479.8 mm 3 479.8 mm 3 601.7 mm 3 601.7 mm
Wheelbase (137 in) (137 in) (141.8 in)a (141.8 in)a
4 013.2 mm 4 013.2 mm
(158 in)b (158 in)b
(5) Overall 5 756 mm 5 756 mm 5 878 mm 5 878 mm
length (226.6 in) (226.6 in) (231.4 in)a (231.4 in)a
6 289 mm 6 289 mm
(247.6 in)b (247.6 in)b
a
4x2 Single rear wheel (SRW)
b
4x2 Dual rear wheel (DRW)

279
Maintenance and Specifications
F250-Crew Cab
Dimension Body style
Crew Cab Crew Cab Crew Cab Crew Cab
4x2/ Short 4x4/ Short 4x2/ Long 4x4/ Long
box box box box
(1) Overall 1960 mm 2 027 mm 1 957 mm 2 022 mm
height (77.2 in) (79.8 in) (77.0 in) (76.6 in)
(2) Track 1 745 mm 1 736 mm 1 745 mm 1 736 mm
(Front / (68.7 in) / (68.4 in) / (68.7 in) / (68.4 in) /
Rear) 1 729 mm 1 729 mm 1 729 mm 1 729 mm
(68.1 in) (68.1 in) (68.1 in) (68.1 in)
(3) Overall 2 031 mm 2 031 mm 2 031 mm 2 031 mm
width (79.9 in) (79.9 in) (79.9 in) (79.9 in)
(4) 3 967 mm 3 967 mm 4 379 mm 4 379 mm
Wheelbase (156.2 in) (156.2 in) (172.4 in) (172.4 in)
(5) Overall 6 243 mm 6 243 mm 6 654 mm 6 654 mm
length (245.8 in) (245.8 in) (262 in) (262 in)

280
Maintenance and Specifications
F350except Crew Cab
Dimension Body style
Chassis Chassis Regular Super Cab
Cab Cab Cab Style Style Side
Regular Super Cab Side
Cab
(1) Overall 1 924 mm 1 928 mm 1 938 mm 1 952 mm
height (75.7 in)a (75.9 in)a (76.3 in)a (76.8 in)a,e
1 897 mm 1 916 mm 1 961 mm 1 963 mm
(74.7 in)b (75.4 in)b (77.2 in)b (77.3 in)a,f
2 028 mm 2 029 mm 2 041 mm 1 939 mm
(79.8 in)c (79.9 in)c (80.3 in)c (76.3 in)b
2 031 mm 2 019 mm 2 018 mm 2 051 mm
(80.0 in)d (79.5 in)d (79.4in)d (80.7 in)c,e
2 039 mm
(80.3 in)c,f
2 019 mm
(79.5 in)d
(2a) Front 1 745 mm 1 745 mm 1 745 mm 1 745 mm
Track (68.7 in)a,b / (68.7 in)a,b / (68.7 in)a,b / (68.7 in)a,b /
1 736 mm 1 736 mm 1 736 mm 1 736 mm
(68.4 in)c,d (68.4 in)c,d (68.4 in)c,d (68.4 in)c,d
(2b) Rear 1 729 mm 1 729 mm 1 729 mm 1 729 mm
Track (68.1 in)a,c / (68.1 in)a,c / (68.1 in)a,c / (68.1 in)a,c /
1 880 mm 1 880 mm 1 880 mm 1 880 mm
(74.0 in)b,d (74.0 in)b,d (74.0 in)b,d (74.0 in)b,d
(3) Overall 2 031 mm 2 031 mm 2 031 mm 2 031 mm
width (79.9 in)a,c / (79.9 in) (79.9 in)a,c (79.9 in)a,c
2 304 mm 2 426 mm 2 426 mm
(90.7 in)b (95.5)b,d (95.5)b,d
2 329 mm
(91.7 in)d

281
Maintenance and Specifications

Dimension Body style


Chassis Chassis Regular Super Cab
Cab Cab Cab Style Style Side
Regular Super Cab Side
Cab
(4) 3 576 mm 4 110 mm 3 480 mm 3 602 mm
Wheelbase (140.8 in) (161.8 in) (137.0 in) (141.8 in)e/
4 186 mm 4 014 mm
(164.8 in) (158.0 in)f
(5) Overall 5 733 mm 6 267 mm 5 756 mm 5 878 mm
length (225.7 (246.7 in) (226.6 in) (231.4 in)e/
in)a,b,c,d/ 6 289 mm
6 343 (249.7 (247.6 in)f
in)b,d
a
4x2 Single rear wheel (SRW)
b
4x2 Dual rear wheel (DRW)
c
4x4 Single rear wheel (SRW)
d
4x4 Dual rear wheel (DRW)
e
Short box
f
Long box

F350-Crew Cab
Body style
Dimension Crew chassis Crew cab-short Crew cab
Cab box long box
(1) Overall 1 929 mm 1 955mm 1 964 mm
height (75.9 in)a/ (77.0 in)a/ (77.3 in)a/
1 926 mm 1 983 mm 1 976 mm
(75.8 in)b/ (78.1 in)b/ (77.8 in)b/
2 026 mm 1 958 mm 1 957 mm
(79.8 in)c/ (77.1 in)c/ (77.0 in)c/
2 038 mm 2 033 mm 2 031 mm
(80.2 in)d (80.0 in)d (80.0 in)d

282
Maintenance and Specifications

Body style
Dimension Crew chassis Crew cab-short Crew cab
Cab box long box
(2a) Track 1 745 mm 1 745 mm 1 745 mm
Front (68.7 in)a,c/ (68.7 in)a,c/ (68.7 in)a,c/
1 736 mm 1 736 mm 1 736 mm
(68.4 in)b,d (68.4 in)b,d (68.4 in)b,d
(2b) Track 1 729 mm 1 729 mm 1 729 mm
Rear (68.1 in)a,c/ (68.1 in)a,c/ (68.1 in)a,c/
1 880 mm 1 880 mm 1 880 mm
(74.0 in)b,d (74.0 in)b,d (74.0 in)b,d
(3) Overall 2 031 mm 2 031 mm 2 031 mm
width (79.9 in)a,c/ (79.9 in)a,c (79.9 in)a,c
2 304 mm 2 426 mm 2 426 mm
(90.7 in)b/ (95.5 in)b,d (95.5 in)b,d
2 329 mm
(91.7 in)d
(4) Wheelbase 4 475 mm 3 967 mm 4 379 mm
(176.2 in ) (156.2 in ) (172.4 in)
(5) Overall 6 632 mm 6 243 mm 6 654 mm
length (261.1 in) (245.8 in) (262.0 in)
a
4x2 Single rear wheel (SRW)
b
4x2 Dual rear wheel (DRW)
c
4x4 Single rear wheel (SRW)
d
4x4 Dual rear wheel (DRW)

283
Maintenance and Specifications
F450
Dimension Body style
Regular Regular Crew Cab Crew Cab
Cab Cab Chassis Chassis
Chassis Chassis Cab 4x2 Cab 4x4
Cab 4x2 Cab 4x4
(1) Overall 2 048 mm 2 051 mm 2 053 mm 2 056 mm
height (80.6 in)a (80.7 in)a (80.8 in) (80.9 in)
2 044 mm 2 044 mm
(80.5 in) b,c (80.5 in) b
2 038 mm 2 033 mm
(80.2 in)d (80.0 in)c,d
(2) Track 1 736 mm 1 736 mm 1 736 mm 1 736 mm
(Front / (68.4 in) / (68.4 in) / (68.4 in) / (68.4 in) /
Rear) 1 880 mm 1880 mm 1 880 mm 1 880 mm
(74.0 in) (74.0 in) (74.0 in) (74.0 in)
(3) Overall 2 377 mm 2 377 mm 2 377 mm 2 377 mm
width (93.6 in) (93.6 in) (93.6 in) (93.6 in)
(4) 3 576 mm 3 576 mm 4 475 mm 4 475 mm
Wheelbase (140.8 in) (140.8 in) (176.2 in) (176.2 in)
4 186 mm 4 186 mm 5 085 (200.2 5 085 (200.2
(164.8 in) (164.8 in) in) in)
4 795 mm 4 795 mm
(188.8 in) (188.8 in)
5 100 mm 5 100 mm
(200.8 in) (200.8 in)

284
Maintenance and Specifications

Dimension Body style


Regular Regular Crew Cab Crew Cab
Cab Cab Chassis Chassis
Chassis Chassis Cab 4x2 Cab 4x4
Cab 4x2 Cab 4x4
(5) Overall 5 733 mm 5 733 mm 6 632 mm 6 632 mm
length (225.7 in)a (225.7 in)a (261.1 in)e (261.1 in)e
6 343 mm 6 343 mm 7 241 mm 7 241 mm
(249.7 in)b (249.7 in)b (285.1 in)f (285.1 in)f
6 952 mm 6 952 mm
(273.7 in)c (273.7 in)c
7 257 mm 7 257 mm
(285.7 in)d (285.7 in)d
a
3 576 mm (140.8 in) wheel base
b
4 186 mm (164.8 in) wheel base
c
4 795 mm (188.8) wheel base
d
5 100 mm (200.8 in) wheel base
e
4 475 mm (176.2 in) wheel base
f
5 085 mm (200.2 in) wheel base

F550
Dimension Body style
Regular Regular Crew Cab Crew Cab
Cab Cab Chassis Chassis
Chassis Chassis Cab 4x2 Cab 4x4
Cab 4x2 Cab 4x4
(1) Overall 2 076 mm 2 075 mm 2 067 mm 2 066 mm
height (81.7 in)a (81.7 in)a (81.4 in) (81.3 in)
2 068 mm 2 063 mm
(81.4 in) b,c (81.2 in) b
2 059 mm 2 059 mm
(81.1 in)d (81.1 in)c
2 049 mm
(80.7 in)d

285
Maintenance and Specifications

Dimension Body style


Regular Regular Crew Cab Crew Cab
Cab Cab Chassis Chassis
Chassis Chassis Cab 4x2 Cab 4x4
Cab 4x2 Cab 4x4
(2) Track 1 736 mm 1 736 mm 1 736 mm 1 736 mm
(Front / (68.4 in) / (68.4 in) / (68.4 in) / (68.4 in) /
Rear) 1 880 mm 1880 mm 1 880 mm 1 880 mm
(74.0 in) (74.0 in) (74.0 in) (74.0 in)
(3) Overall 2 377 mm 2 377 mm 2 377 mm 2 377 mm
width (93.6 in) (93.6 in) (93.6 in) (93.6 in)
(4) 3 576 mm 3 576 mm 4 475 mm 4 475 mm
Wheelbase (140.8 in) (140.8 in) (176.2 in) (176.2 in)
4 186 mm 4 186 mm 5 085 (200.2 5 085 (200.2
(164.8 in) (164.8 in) in) in)
4 795 mm 4 795 mm
(188.8 in) (188.8 in)
5 100 mm 5 100 mm
(200.8 in) (200.8 in)
(5) Overall 5 733 mm 5 733 mm 6 632 mm 6 632 mm
length (225.7 in)a (225.7 in)a (261.1 in)e (261.1 in)e
6 343 mm 6 343 mm 7 241 mm 7 241 mm
(249.7 in)b (249.7 in)b (285.1 in)f (285.1 in)f
6 952 mm 6 952 mm
(273.7 in)c (273.7 in)c
7 257 mm 7 257 mm
(285.7 in)d (285.7 in)d
a
3 576 mm (140.8 in) wheel base
b
4 186 mm (164.8 in) wheel base
c
4 795 mm (188.8) wheel base
d
5 100 mm (200.8 in) wheel base
e
4 475 mm (176.2 in) wheel base
f
5 085 mm (200.2 in) wheel base

286
Maintenance and Specifications

287
Maintenance and Specifications
IDENTIFYING YOUR VEHICLE
Certification label
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration Regulations require
that a Certification label be affixed
to a vehicle and prescribe where the
Certification label may be located.
The Certification label is located on
the front door latch pillar on the
drivers side.

Vehicle identification number


The vehicle identification number is
attached to a metal tag and is
located on the driver side XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
instrument panel. (Please note that
in the graphic XXXX is
representative of your vehicle
identification number.)

288
Maintenance and Specifications
1. World manufacturer identifier
2. Brake type and gross vehicle
weight rating (GVWR)
3. Vehicle line, series, body type
4. Engine type
5. Check digit
6. Model year
7. Assembly plant
8. Production sequence number
Engine number
The engine number (the last eight numbers of the vehicle identification
number) is stamped on the engine block, transmission, frame and
transfer case (if equipped).

289
Accessories
FORD ACCESSORIES FOR YOUR VEHICLE
A wide selection of genuine Ford accessories are available for your
vehicle through your local authorized Ford, Lincoln, Mercury or Ford of
Canada dealer. These quality accessories have been specifically
engineered to fulfill your automotive needs; they are custom designed to
complement the style and aerodynamic appearance of your vehicle. In
addition, each accessory is made from high quality materials and meets
or exceeds Fords rigorous engineering and safety specifications. Ford
Motor Company will repair or replace any properly dealer-installed Ford
accessory found to be defective in factory-supplied materials or
workmanship during the warranty period, as well as any component
damaged by the defective accessory. The accessory will be warranted for
whichever provides you the greatest benefit:
12 months or 20 000 km (12 000 miles) (whichever occurs first), or
the remainder of your new vehicle limited warranty.
This means that genuine Ford accessories purchased along with your
new vehicle and installed by the dealer are covered for the full length of
your New Vehicles Limited Warranty 3 years or 60 000 km (36 000
miles) (whichever occurs first). Contact your dealer for details and a
copy of the warranty.
Not all accessories are available for all models.
Vehicle Security
Remote keyless entry
Styled wheel protector locks
Vehicle security systems
Comfort and convenience
Air conditioner
Cargo organizers
Cargo storage bin
Cargo trays
Cell phone holder
Engine block heaters
Manual sliding rear window
Power sliding rear window
Tire step

290
Accessories
Travel equipment
Adjustable Towing System
Auto headlamp system with Daytime Running Lights (DRL)
Bed Tent
Box Aluminum Rack cargo storage systems
Daytime running lights (DRL)
Electrochromic inside mirror with compass
Electrochromic inside mirror with compass and temperature display
Fog lights
Battery Warmer
Highway safety and first aid kit
Off road lights
Pickup box rails
ROC2 hitch mounted bike courier
Running boards and tubular running bars
Running boards diamond plate
Seatback organizer
Speed control
Towing mirrors
Trailer hitch, Class IV
Trailer hitch bars and balls
Trailer hitch mounted bike carrier
Trailer hitch wiring adaptor
Trailer wiring harness
Trailgate table
Protection and appearance equipment
Air bag anti-theft locks
All weather vinyl floor mats
Bed mat/bedliner tailgate covers
Bed hooks
Bed mats

291
Accessories
Bedliners
Carpet floor mats
Cleaners, waxes and polishes
Diamond plate bed rail caps
Diamond plate front box protection
Diamond plate splash guards
Diamond plate tool box
Door edge guards
Fender flares
Flat splash guards
Front end covers (full)
Grill guards/brush guards
Hood deflectors
Leather wrap steering wheel
Locking gas cap
Lubricants and oils
Molded splash guards
Rally bars/Combo bars
Rear window deflector
Side window air deflectors
Spare tire lock
Stainless steel grill insert
Step bumpers
Tailgate covers (Diamond plate)
Tonneau cover (soft)
Touch-up paint
Truck cover
Universal floor mats
Wheel covers
Wood trim

292
Accessories
For maximum vehicle performance, keep the following information in
mind when adding accessories or equipment to your vehicle:
When adding accessories, equipment, passengers and luggage to your
vehicle, do not exceed the total weight capacity of the vehicle or of
the front or rear axle (GVWR or GAWR as indicated on the Safety
compliance certification label). Consult your dealer for specific weight
information.
The Federal Communications Commission (FCC) and Canadian Radio
Telecommunications Commission (CRTC) regulate the use of mobile
communications systems - such as two-way radios, telephones and
theft alarms - that are equipped with radio transmitters. Any such
equipment installed in your vehicle should comply with FCC or CRTC
regulations and should be installed only by a qualified service
technician.
Mobile communications systems may harm the operation of your
vehicle, particularly if they are not properly designed for automotive
use or are not properly installed. When operated, such systems may
cause the engine to stumble or stall or cause the transmission to be
damaged or operate improperly. In addition, such systems may be
damaged or their performance may be affected by operating your
vehicle. (Citizens band [CB] transceivers, garage door openers and
other transmitters with outputs of five watts or less will not ordinarily
affect your vehicles operation.)
Ford cannot assume responsibility for any adverse effects or damage
that may result from the use of such equipment.

293
Index
A refill capacities ........................273
traction lok ..............................135
ABS (see Brakes) .....................133
Accessory delay ..........................70 B
Air bag supplemental restraint Battery .......................................241
system ........................................106 acid, treating emergencies .....241
and child safety seats ............108 charging system
description ..............................106 warning light .............................13
disposal ....................................110 jumping a disabled battery ....213
driver air bag ..........................108 maintenance-free ....................241
indicator light ...................12, 110 replacement, specifications ...272
operation .................................108 servicing ..................................241
passenger air bag ...................108 voltage gauge ............................16
passenger deactivation BeltMinder .................................101
switch ......................................110 Brakes ........................................131
Air cleaner filter .......265266, 272 anti-lock ...........................132133
anti-lock brake system
Air conditioning (ABS) warning light .........12, 133
manual heating and air brake warning light ..................12
conditioning system .................53 fluid, checking and adding ....260
Air suspension fluid, refill capacities ..............273
warning light .............................13 fluid, specifications .........276, 279
Ambulance packages ....................6 lubricant
specifications ..................276, 279
Antifreeze parking ....................................134
(see Engine coolant) ................243 pedals (see Power
Anti-lock brake system adjustable foot pedals) ............72
(see Brakes) ..............................133 shift interlock ..........................136
Audio system Break-in period .............................5
(see Radio) ................19, 23, 29, 38 Bulbs ............................................59
Automatic transmission
driving an automatic C
overdrive .................................137
fluid, adding ............................261 Capacities for refilling fluids ....273
fluid, checking ........................261 CD-6 disc .....................................38
fluid, refill capacities ..............273
fluid, specification ..................279 CD-single premium .....................29
Auxiliary power point ...........69, 77 Certification Label ....................288
Axle Changing a tire .........................202
lubricant specifications ..276, 279 Child safety restraints ..............115

294
Index
child safety belts ....................115 Ford accessories for your
Child safety seats ......................118 vehicle .....................................234
attaching with tether Ford Extended
straps ...............................122123 Service Plan ............................222
in front seat ............................120 Getting assistance outside
in rear seat ..............................120 the U.S. and Canada ..............226
tether anchorage hardware ...122 Getting roadside assistance ...195
Getting the service
Cleaning your vehicle you need .................................220
engine compartment ..............230 Ordering additional
exterior ....................................233 owners literature ...................227
instrument panel ....................232 The Dispute Settlement
interior .....................................233 Board .......................................223
plastic parts ............................231 Utilizing the Mediation/
washing ....................................229 Arbitration Program ...............226
waxing .....................................229
wheels ......................................230 D
wiper blades ....................231232
woodtone trim ........................232 Daytime running lamps
Climate control (see Air (see Lamps) ................................57
conditioning or Heating) ......51, 53 Dipstick
Clock ..........................22, 26, 34, 42 automatic transmission
fluid ..........................................261
Clutch engine oil .................................238
fluid ..........................................261
operation while driving ..........140 Doors
recommended shift speeds ....141 door ajar warning .....................14
lubricant specifications ..........276
Compass, electronic ....................79
calibration .................................80 Driveline universal joint
set zone adjustment .................80 and slip yoke .............................265
Console ........................................77 Driving under special
overhead ....................................68 conditions ..........................153, 157
sand .........................................155
Controls snow and ice ...........................158
power seat .................................90 through water .................156, 161
Coolant
checking and adding ..............243 E
refill capacities ................247, 273
specifications ..................276, 279 Emergencies, roadside
Cruise control jump-starting ..........................213
(see Speed control) ....................72 Emission control system ..........257
Customer Assistance ................195 Engine ........................................279

295
Index
check engine/service engine capacity ...................................273
soon light ..................................10 choosing the right fuel ...........252
cleaning ...................................230 comparisons with EPA fuel
coolant .....................................243 economy estimates .................257
diesel ...........................................6 detergent in fuel .....................253
fail-safe coolant ......................248 filling your vehicle
idle speed control ...................241 with fuel ..................249, 251, 254
lubrication filter, specifications ........253, 272
specifications ..................276, 279 fuel pump shut-off switch .....196
refill capacities ........................273 gauge .........................................17
service points ..........................237 improving fuel economy ........254
starting after a collision .........196 low fuel warning light ..............13
octane rating ...................252, 279
Engine block heater .................130 quality ......................................252
Engine oil ..................................238 running out of fuel .................253
checking and adding ..............238 safety information relating
dipstick ....................................238 to automotive fuels ................249
filter, specifications ........240, 272 Fuses ..................................198199
recommendations ...................240
refill capacities ........................273 G
specifications ..................276, 279
Exhaust fumes ..........................131 Garage door opener ....................68
Gas cap (see Fuel cap) ......11, 251
F
Gas mileage (see Fuel
Fail safe cooling ........................248 economy) ...................................254
Fluid capacities .........................273 Gauges .........................................15
battery voltage gauge ...............16
Foglamps .....................................57 engine coolant temperature
Four-Wheel Drive gauge .........................................15
vehicles ................................14, 146 engine oil pressure gauge ........16
description ..............................150 fuel gauge ..................................17
driving off road .......................152 odometer ...................................18
electronic shift ................146, 150 speedometer .............................18
indicator light ...................14, 147 tachometer ................................18
lever operated shift ................148 trip odometer ............................18
manual locking hubs ..............146 GAWR (Gross Axle Weight
preparing to drive your Rating) .......................................161
vehicle .....................................136 calculating ...............................163
Fuel ............................................249 definition .................................161
calculating fuel economy .......254 driving with a heavy load ......161
cap .....................................11, 251 location ....................................161

296
Index
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight positioning ...............................202
Rating) .......................................161 storage .....................................202
calculating .......................161, 163 Jump-starting your vehicle ......213
definition .................................161
driving with a heavy load ......161 K
location ....................................161

H Keyless entry system


autolock .....................................88
Hazard flashers .........................196 Keys
Headlamps ...................................56 key in ignition chime ...............14
aiming ........................................58 positions of the ignition .........127
autolamp system .......................56 removing from the ignition ....144
daytime running lights .............57
flash to pass ..............................58 L
high beam ...........................14, 57
replacing bulbs ...................6061 Lamps
turning on and off ....................56 autolamp system .................56, 59
warning chime ..........................15 bulb replacement
Heating specifications chart ..................60
heater only system ...................51 cargo lamps ...............................58
heating and air conditioning daytime running light ...............57
system .......................................53 fog lamps ...................................57
Hood ..........................................236 headlamps .................................56
headlamps, flash to pass ..........58
I instrument panel, dimming .....58
interior lamps ...........................59
Ignition ...............................127, 279 replacing bulbs ...................5965
removing the key ....................144
Lane change indicator
Infant seats (see Turn signal) ........................59
(see Safety seats) .....................118
Lights, warning and indicator ....10
Inspection/maintenance air bag ........................................12
(I/M) testing ..............................258 anti-lock brakes (ABS) ....12, 133
Instrument panel brake ..........................................12
cleaning ...................................232 charging system ........................13
cluster ........................................10 check coolant ............................11
lighting up panel cruise indicator .........................13
and interior ...............................58 door ajar ....................................14
fuel cap light .............................11
J high beam .................................14
low fuel ......................................13
Jack ............................................202 safety belt .................................12

297
Index
service engine soon ..................10 P
speed control ............................76
turn signal indicator .................14 Panic alarm feature, remote
Limited slip axle entry system ................................85
(see Traction Loc) ....................135 Parking brake ............................134
Load limits .................................161 Parts (see Motorcraft parts) ....272
GAWR ......................................161 Pedals (see Power adjustable
GVWR ......................................161 foot pedals) .................................72
trailer towing ..........................161
Power distribution box
Loading instructions .................163 (see Fuses) ...............................199
Locks Power door locks ..................82, 88
autolock .....................................88
childproof ..................................83 Power mirrors .............................71
Lubricant specifications ...276, 279 Power point .................................69
Lumbar support, seats .........9192 Power steering ..........................135
fluid, checking and adding ....259
M fluid, refill capacity ................273
fluid, specifications .........276, 279
Manual transmission .................140 Power Windows ...........................69
fluid capacities ........................273 Preparing to drive
lubricant specifications ..........279 your vehicle ...............................136
reverse .....................................143
Message center ...........................77 R
english/metric button ...............78
menu button .............................78 Radio ..........................19, 23, 29, 38
Mirrors .........................................68 Radio reception ...........................50
fold away ...................................71 Relays ........................................198
side view mirrors (power) .......71
Remote entry system ...........83, 85
Motorcraft parts ................253, 272 illuminated entry ......................87
locking/unlocking doors .....82, 84
O panic alarm ...............................85
replacement/additional
Octane rating ............................252 transmitters ...............................86
Odometer .....................................18 replacing the batteries .............85
Oil (see Engine oil) ..................238 Reverse sensing system ...........144
Overdrive .....................................76 Roadside assistance ..................195

298
Index
S Steering .....................................135
Steering wheel
Safety belts (see Safety controls ................................67, 72
restraints) ..................14, 9396, 98 tilting .........................................67
Safety defects, reporting ..........228
Safety restraints ..............9396, 98 T
belt minder .............................101
cleaning the safety belts ........105 Tachometer .................................18
extension assembly ................104 Tailgate ........................................81
for adults .............................9496 Temperature control
for children .............................115 (see Climate control) .................51
lap belt ....................................100
warning light and Tires ...........................202, 267268
chime ...........................12, 14, 101 changing ..........................202, 205
checking the pressure ............268
Safety seats for children ..........118 replacing ..................................271
Seat belts (see rotating ....................................270
Safety restraints) ........................93 snow tires and chains ............271
Seats ............................................89 tire grades ...............................268
child safety seats ....................118 treadwear ................................267
Servicing your vehicle ..............235 Towing .......................................164
trailer towing ..........................164
Snowplowing .................6, 190193 wrecker ....................................218
Spare tire (see Traction-lok rear axle ...............135
Changing the Tire) ...................202
Transfer case
Spark plugs, fluid checking .........................265
specifications .....................272, 279
Transmission .............................136
Special notice ................................7 fluid, checking and adding
ambulance conversions ..............6 (automatic) .............................261
diesel-powered vehicles .............6 fluid, checking and adding
four-wheel drive (manual) .................................264
vehicles ............................193194 fluid, refill capacities ..............273
utility-type vehicles ....................6 lubricant
Specification chart, specifications ..................276, 279
lubricants ...........................276, 279 manual operation ....................140
Speed control ..............................72 Transmission control indicator
Speedometer ...............................18 light ..............................................13
Starting your vehicle ........127129 Trip odometer .............................18
jump starting ..........................213 Turn signal ............................14, 59

299
Index
V Washer fluid ..............................238

Vehicle dimensions ...................279 Water, Driving through .............161


Vehicle Identification Number Windows
(VIN) ..........................................288 power .........................................69
Vehicle loading ..........................161 Windshield washer fluid and
wipers
Ventilating your vehicle ...........131
checking and adding fluid .....238
W checking and cleaning ..............66
operation ...................................66
Warning chimes .....................1415 replacing wiper blades .............67
Warning lights (see Lights) .......10 Wrecker towing .........................218

300
301
302
303
304